Professional Documents
Culture Documents
269443
Original Instructions
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
.
d
MAZATROL MATRIX 2
ve
er
(for Turning Machines)
s
re
EIA/ISO Program
ts
gh
MANUAL No.: H740PB6011E
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
Serial No. :
43
A
R
94
Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this
PO
26
manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the
R
o.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
IMPORTANT NOTICE
IM
K
1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the
ZA
safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or
A
material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible.
M
YA
2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety. If such modifications are
3
3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations
(c
may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all
ht
4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to
op
our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject to
C
change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical Center
or Technology Center.
5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use.
6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology
Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name.
10. 2011
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K 94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as
the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who
create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the
contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine.
Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding
functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.
.
d
Rule
ve
er
1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states
s
re
usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working
ts
states may take place at the user site.
gh
During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to
ri
its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below.
ll
.A
2. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not
N
rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones,
O
TI
not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully
43
A
covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand.
R
94
“inexecutable” functions.
R
o.
O
N
3. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as
C
al
follows:
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
DANGER
ZA
A
M
life or body.
WARNING
3
01
)2
machine damage.
ht
CAUTION
ig
yr
op
C
HGENPA0070E S-1
Serial No. 269443
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Basics
! After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the
operating panel until an initial display has been made.
WARNING ! Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered
and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors,
unexpected operation of the machine will result.
! Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine
operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal
operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block, and
.
d
other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path check,
ve
er
Virtual Machining, and other functions, if provided.
s
! Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the
re
ts
particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable feed
gh
rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used, those
ri
of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ from
ll
the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or rotational
.A
speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the machine.
N
O
! Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of
TI
43
correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction
A
R
94
! Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the
R
o.
machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes
N
absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly
al
K
ri
any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified
A
IM
- Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions
01
- Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation
ig
Function
yr
op
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken –
C
S-2
Serial No. 269443
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Programming
! Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated
program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate in
unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the event
WARNING
of contact with the tool.
! During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface
velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For
the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed
limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds.
d .
! Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or
ve
er
parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these
s
data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being
re
performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently
ts
gh
from the way it did before.
ri
! If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data
ll
commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of
.A
the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs.
N
O
! If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc
TI
43
interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of the
A
R
94
machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will be
PO
26
interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)
R
o.
! The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use
O
N
the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution
al
K
ri
issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid
K
temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would
ZA
operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after
A
making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC
M
! The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter the
3
01
tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier function
)2
! The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the
ht
Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended machine
op
operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands before
C
S-3
Serial No. 269443
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
! For the machines of INTEGREX e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using
an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate com-
mand) of the EIA/ISO program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through
180 degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the
plus side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the
program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected
positions may incite collisions.
To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use
the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code command
(G50.1, G51.1).
! After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path
d.
ve
check function, the Virtual Machining function, and other functions, and confirm that the
er
program operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven
s
re
machining program to change in operational status.
ts
If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status,
gh
interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation.
ri
For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present
ll
.A
inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the common unit
N
of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move from that
O
position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be present on
TI
43
this path. A
R
94
For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of the
PO
26
tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including
R
O
N
C
al
K
ri
for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using
A
IM
these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path.
CAUTION
K
! Before starting the machining operation, be sure to confirm all contents of the program
ZA
obtained by conversion. Imperfections in the program could lead to machine damage and
A
operator injury.
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-4
Serial No. 269443
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Operations
! Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system variables
#3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that makes the
corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give thorough
WARNING
notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the system
variables before starting the above operations.
! If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image
function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be
shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the
d.
mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take
ve
the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures being
er
taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur.
s
re
! Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the
ts
gh
feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed
ri
rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value.
ll
! After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other
.A
commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may
N
O
result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for the
TI
active program.
43
A
R
94
PO
26
! During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement.
R
o.
! For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after
N
C
al
turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until
K
CAUTION
ri
ZA
manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area.
Se
! Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed
K
operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently, axial
ZA
S-5
Serial No. 269443
d.
ve
- Always use an initialized USB memory. The location of the USB connector depends on the
er
machine model, as shown below.
s
re
ts
gh
ri
USB memory
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Machines with left hand door Machines with right hand door
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
On machines with a random ATC feature, each actual ATC operation changes the tool data (in
pocket numbers). Be sure not to run the machine after loading the externally stored data of the
TOOL DATA display without having confirmed the data’s correspondence to the current tooling
on the magazine. Otherwise the machine cannot be be guaranteed to operate normally.
S-6
Serial No. 269443
Limited Warranty
The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its
non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit.
Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed
below.
1. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software
products (including user-created ones)
.
2. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems
d
ve
er
3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer
s
re
equipment
ts
gh
ri
ll
Operating Environment
.A
N
1. Ambient temperature
O
TI
During machine operation: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
43
A
R
94
PO
2. Relative humidity
26
R
o.
deteriorate quickly.
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Note: Do not attempt to delete or modify the data stored in the following folder.
A
M
Although this folder is not used when the NC unit is running normally, it contains important data
3
If this data has been deleted or modified, the NC unit may require a long recovery time. Be sure
(c
S-7
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K
S-8 E
94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
CONTENTS
Page
d .
ve
er
2 DATA FORMATS.................................................................................. 2-1
s
re
ts
2-1 Tape Codes ........................................................................................................2-1
gh
ri
ll
2-2 Program Formats ...............................................................................................2-5
.A
N
2-3 Tape Data Storage Format.................................................................................2-6
O
TI
43
A
R
94
R
o.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
A
IM
C-1
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
5-3 Linear Interpolation: G01 ....................................................................................5-5
s er
re
5-4 Circular Interpolation: G02, G03.........................................................................5-7
ts
gh
5-5 Radius Designated Circular Interpolation: G02, G03........................................5-10
ri
ll
.A
5-6 Plane Selection: G17, G18, G19 ......................................................................5-12
N
O
TI
5-6-1 Outline .................................................................................................................. 5-12
43
A
R
94
PO
26
O
N
K
ri
ZA
Se
5-11 Helical Interpolation: G17, G18, G19 and G02, G03 ........................................5-31
C-2
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
6-4 Selecting a Feed Rate and Effects on Each Control Axis...................................6-3
s er
re
6-5 Threading Leads.................................................................................................6-6
ts
gh
6-6 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration..................................................................6-7
ri
ll
.A
6-7 Limitation of Speed.............................................................................................6-7
N
O
TI
43
PO
26
O
N
C
al
ZA
Se
C-3
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
10-3 Tool Function (8-Digit T-Code) .........................................................................10-2
s er
re
11 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS............................................................. 11-1
ts
gh
ri
11-1 Tool Offset........................................................................................................11-1
ll
.A
N
11-2 Tool Position Offset ..........................................................................................11-3
O
TI
43
A
11-3 Nose Radius/Tool Radius Compensation: G40, G41, G42...............................11-5
R
94
PO
26
O
N
K
ri
ZA
Se
11-3-4 Other operations during nose radius/tool radius compensation ......................... 11-15
ZA
A
C-4
Serial No. 269443
.
12-2 Compound Fixed Cycles ..................................................................................12-8
d
ve
er
12-2-1 Longitudinal roughing cycle: G71 ......................................................................... 12-9
s
re
ts
12-2-2 Transverse roughing cycle: G72......................................................................... 12-14
gh
ri
12-2-3 Contour-parallel roughing cycle: G73 ................................................................. 12-16
ll
.A
N
12-2-4 Finishing cycle: G70 ........................................................................................... 12-20
O
TI
43
A
12-2-5 Longitudinal cut-off cycle: G74 ........................................................................... 12-21
R
94
PO
26
O
N
K
ri
ZA
Se
12-2-8 General notes on the compound fixed cycles G70 to G76 ................................. 12-34
A
IM
K
12-3-7 General notes on the hole machining fixed cycles ............................................. 12-45
12-3-8 Sample programs with fixed cycles for hole machining ...................................... 12-46
C-5
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
er
12-5 Subprogram Control: M98, M99 .....................................................................12-54
s
re
ts
12-6 End Processing: M02, M30, M998, M999.......................................................12-62
gh
ri
12-7 Chamfering and Corner Rounding at Right Angle Corner ..............................12-63
ll
.A
N
12-8 Chamfering and Corner Rounding at Arbitrary Angle Corner Function...........12-66
O
TI
43
A
12-8-1 Chamfering at arbitrary angle corner: , C_ ......................................................... 12-66
R
94
PO
26
O
N
C
al
ZA
Se
12-10-8 External output command (Output onto the hard disk) ..................................... 12-116
C-6
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
13-5 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Selection: G54.1
er
(Option) ..........................................................................................................13-10
s
re
ts
13-6 Shift of Workpiece Coordinate System ...........................................................13-12
gh
ri
ll
13-7 Programmed Shift of Workpiece Coordinate System .....................................13-12
.A
N
O
13-8 Selection of Machine Coordinate System: G53 ..............................................13-13
TI
43
A
R
94
R
o.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
A
IM
C-7
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
17-1 Programming for Compound Machining ...........................................................17-1
s er
re
17-2 Waiting Command: M950 to M997, P1 to P99999999......................................17-2
ts
gh
ri
17-3 Balanced Cutting ..............................................................................................17-4
ll
.A
N
17-4 Milling with the Lower Turret.............................................................................17-6
O
TI
43
A
17-5 Compound Machining Patterns ........................................................................17-8
R
94
PO
26
O
N
C
al
ZA
Se
A
IM
C-8 E
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
Linear axis
er
Rotational axis
s
Metric system Inch system
re
Units of program data input 0.0001 mm 0.00001 in 0.0001 deg
ts
gh
Units of data setting 0.0001 mm 0.00001 in 0.0001 deg
ri
ll
Note 1: Inch/metric selection can be freely made using either bit 4 of parameter F91 (“0” for
.A
metric, “1” for inches; validated through power-off and -on) or G-code commands (G20,
N
G21).
O
TI
Selection using the G-code commands is valid only for program data input.
43
A
Variables and offsetting data (such as tool offsetting data) should therefore be set
R
94
beforehand using the appropriate unit (inch or metric) for the particular machining
PO
26
requirements.
R
o.
O
N
Note 2: Metric data and inch data cannot be used at the same time.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
A
IM
Using a predetermined parameter, machining program data can be processed as set in units of
one micron. There may be cases that a machining program which has been set in units of one
K
ZA
micron is to be used with a numerical control unit based on 0.1 micron increments. In such cases,
use of this parameter allows the machine to perform the required machining operations without
A
M
All types of coordinate data (axis movement data) not provided with the decimal point will be
01
multiplied by a factor of 10. This does not apply, indeed, to preset tool-offsetting data designated
)2
Program
Control axis MAZATROL (B) applicability
yr
1-1
1
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
ht
(c
)2
01
3
UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K
1-2 E
94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
DATA FORMATS 2
2 DATA FORMATS
d .
Note 1: Codes not included in the tape codes shown in Fig. 2-1 will result in an error when they
ve
are read.
ser
re
Note 2: Of all codes specified as the ISO codes but not specified as the EIA codes, only the
following codes can be designated using the data I/O (Tape) parameters TAP9 to
ts
gh
TAP14:
ri
[ Bracket Open
ll
] Bracket Close
.A
# Sharp
N
O
∗ Asterisk
TI
= Equal sign
43
A
: Colon
R
94
PO
However, you cannot designate codes that overlap existing ones or that result in parity
26
error.
o.
O
N
Note 3: EIA/ISO code identification is made automatically according to the first EOB/LF code
al
appearing after the NC unit has been reset. (EOB: End Of Block, LF: Line Feed)
ri
ZA
Se
During tape-based automatic operation, data storage into the memory, or data searching, the NC
K
unit will ignore the entire information up to the first EOB code (;) in the tape when the unit is
ZA
turned on or reset. That is, significant information in a tape refers to the information contained in
A
M
the interval from the time a character or numeric code appears, following the first EOB code (;)
YA
after the NC unit has been reset, until a reset command is given.
3
01
The entire information in the area from Control Out “(” to Control In “)” will be ignored in regard to
(c
machine control, while they will surely be displayed on the data display unit. Thus, this area can
ht
be used to contain information, such as the name and number of the command tape, that is not
ig
yr
During tape storage, however, the information in this area will also be stored. The NC unit will
C
2-1
Serial No. 269443
2 DATA FORMATS
ECN N CE
O U P ROGR AM U NO . 1 0 1 O
BOL L I B
.
Name of tape is printed out
d
ve
er
ECN D ND N N D N DNNCE
s
O U 1 1 E 1 1 U ERRRUORR / U 1 1 E 1 1 U 2 EUU O
re
BO L L L L L L L L L L L I B
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
PO
26
EC S E
al
O G 0 0 X – 8 5 0 0 0 Y– 6 4 0 0 0 ( C U T T E R RE T U R N ) O
ri
ZA
BR P B
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
MEP004
(c
ht
In general, the EOR (End Of Record) code is punched at both ends of a tape and has the
op
following functions:
C
2-2
Serial No. 269443
DATA FORMATS 2
4. Tape creation method for tape operation (Only when a rewinding device is used)
.d
ve
er
The two meters of dummy at both ends and the EOR (%) at the head are not required when a
s
re
rewinding device is not used.
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-3
Serial No. 269443
2 DATA FORMATS
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
.
0 0
d
ve
A A
B B
er
C C
s
D D
re
E E
F F
ts
G G
gh
H H
I I
ri
J J
ll
K K
.A
L L
M M
N
N N
O
O O
P
TI
P
Q
43
Q A
R R
R
94
S S
PO
T T
26
U U
R
V V
o.
W
O
W
N
X X
C
Y Y
al
Z Z
ri
ZA
+ +
Se
– –
.
A
.
,
IM
,
/ /
EOR (End of Record) %
K
:
M
#
∗
YA
Definable in parameters
=
[
3
]
01
& &
CR (Carriage Return)
ht
$ [1]
ig
’ (Apostrophe)
yr
;
<
op
>
C
?
@
”
DEL (Delete) DEL (Delete)
AS (All Space=Feed)* NULL [2]
AM (All Mark=EOB+DEL)* DEL (Delete)
* The codes asterisked above are not EIA codes, LF or NL acts as EOB and %
but may be used for the convenience’s sake. acts as EOR.
MEP006
2-4
Serial No. 269443
DATA FORMATS 2
Codes in section [1] will only be stored as tape data when they are present in a comment section,
and ignored elsewhere in the significant information area.
Codes in section [2] are non-operative and will always be ignored (but undergo the parity-V
check).
A dotted area indicates that the EIA Standard provides no corresponding codes.
d .
A word is a set of characters arranged as shown below, and information is processed in words.
ve
s er
Word
re
ts
gh
ri
Numeral
ll
.A
Alphabet (address)
N
O
Word configuration
TI
43
A
R
94
The alphabetic character at the beginning of a word is referred to as an address, which defines
PO
26
K
ri
ZA
Program No. O8
Se
Sequence No. N5
IM
0.0001 mm (deg.),
Moving axis X+54 Y+54 Z+54 α+54 X+45 Y+45 Z+45 α+45
ZA
0.00001 in
A
0.0001 mm (deg.),
M
unit 0.0001 in
01
Feed
0.00001 in F33 (per revolution) F24 (per revolution)
(c
0.0001 mm (deg.),
ht
Tool offset T2 or T3
yr
op
Miscellaneous function M3 × 4
C
Spindle function S5
Tool function T4 or T6
No. 2 miscellaneous function B8, A8 or C8
Subprogram P4 Q5 L4
Variables number #5
2-5
Serial No. 269443
2 DATA FORMATS
1. Code O8 here indicates that program number can be set as an unsigned integer of eight
digits following O, and for X+54, “+” indicates that the value can be signed (negative) and
the two-digit number (54) indicates that the decimal point can be used and that five digits
before and four after the decimal point are effective (5 + 4 = 9 digits are effective for a
designation without decimal point).
2. The alpha sign (α) denotes additional axis address. +44 will be used when α is specified for
rotational axis.
3. The number of digits in the words is checked by the maximum number of digits in the
addresses.
4. When data with decimal point is used for address for which decimal input is not available,
decimal figures will be ignored.
d.
ve
5. If the number of integral digits exceeds the specified format, an alarm will result.
ser
6. If the number of decimal digits exceed the specified format, the excess will be rounded.
re
ts
2. Blocks
gh
ri
A block, unit of instruction, contains a number of words which constitute information necessary
ll
for the NC machine to perform an operation. The end of each block must be indicated by an EOB
.A
(End Of Block) code.
N
O
TI
3. Programs
43
PO
26
4. Program end
R
o.
O
N
K
ri
ZA
A
IM
As with tape operation, tape data to be stored into the memory can be either of ISO or EIA code.
The first EOB code read in after resetting is used by the NC unit for automatic identification of the
K
ZA
character immediately succeeding the first EOB code the EOR code, and in all other cases, from
YA
the current tape position to the EOR code. Usually, therefore, start tape data storage operation
3
Optional block skip is a function that selectively ignores that specific block within a machining
op
Any block beginning with “/” will be ignored if the [BLOCK SKIP] menu function is set to ON, or
will be executed if the menu function is set to OFF.
For example, if all blocks are to be executed for a type of parts but specific blocks are not to be
executed for another type, then different parts can be machined using one and the same
program that contains the “/” code at the beginning of the specific blocks.
2-6
Serial No. 269443
DATA FORMATS 2
2. Operating notes
1. Blocks that have already been read into the pre-read buffer cannot be skipped.
2. This function is valid even during sequence number search.
3. During tape data storage (input) or output, all blocks, including those having a “/” code, are
in- or outputted, irrespective of the status of the [BLOCK SKIP] menu function.
. d
Program numbers are assigned to command blocks as required. A program number must be set
ve
using the letter O (address) and a numeric of a maximum of eight digits that follow O.
s er
Sequence numbers identify command blocks forming a machining program. A sequence number
re
must be set using the letter N (address) and a numeric of a maximum of five digits that follow N.
ts
Block numbers are counted automatically within the NC unit, and reset to 0 each time a program
gh
ri
number or a sequence number is read. These numbers will be counted up by one if the block to
ll
be read does not have an assigned program number or sequence number.
.A
All blocks of a machining program, therefore, can be uniquely defined by combining program
N
number, sequence number, and block number as shown in the table below.
O
TI
43
1234 100 1
al
G98 S1000;
K
ri
ZA
N102 G71 P210 Q220 I0.2 K0.2 D0.5 F600; 1234 102 0
Se
1234 210 3
M
G01 Z55.;
YA
% 1234 240 0
C
2-7
Serial No. 269443
2 DATA FORMATS
2-6 Parity-H/V
One method of checking if the tape is correctly created is by parity checks. Parity checks are
performed to check a tape for errors in punched codes, that is, for punching errors. There are two
types of parity checks: parity-H and parity-V.
1. Parity-H check
Parity-H checks are intended to check the quantity of punched holes which form one character,
and performed during tape operation, tape loading, and sequence-number searching.
A parity-H error occurs in the following cases:
- ISO Codes
d .
ve
If a code with an odd number of punched holes is present in the significant information area.
er
- EIA Codes
s
re
If a code with an even number of punched holes is present in the significant information area or
ts
if non-punched holes (sprockets only) are present after a significant code in one block.
gh
Parity-H error (for EIA codes)
ri
Example 1:
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
K
ri
ZA
One block
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
MEP007
ig
yr
If a parity-H error occurs, the tape will stop at the position next to the error code.
op
C
2-8
Serial No. 269443
DATA FORMATS 2
2. Parity-V check
Parity-V checks will be performed during tape operation, tape loading, or sequence-number
searching, if parity-V check item on the PARAMETER display is set to ON. Parity-V during
memory operation, however, will not be checked.
A parity-V error occurs in the following case:
If an odd number of codes are present in the significant information area from the first significant
code in the vertical direction to the EOB code (;), that is, if an odd number of characters are
present in one block.
In the event of a parity-V error, the tape stops at a code next to the EOB (;).
Example 2: An example of parity-V error
.d
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
N
O
TI
43
PO
26
Note 1: During a parity-V check, some types of code are not counted as characters. See Fig.
R
o.
Note 2: Space codes in the area from the first EOB code to the first address code or slash code
al
K
ri
ZA
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-9
Serial No. 269443
2 DATA FORMATS
.
Virtual-axis interpolation G07 00
d
ve
Cylindrical interpolation G07.1 00
er
Exact-stop check G09 00
s
re
Data setting mode ON G10 00
ts
Command address OFF G10.1 00
gh
Data setting mode OFF G11 00
ri
Polar coordinate interpolation ON G12.1 26
ll
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF ▲G13.1 26
.A
X-Y plane selection ■G17 02
N
O
Z-X plane selection ■G18 02
TI
Y-Z plane selection ■G19 02
43
Inch command
A ■G20 06
R
94
PO
O
N
ZA
2-10
Serial No. 269443
DATA FORMATS 2
Function G-code Group
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2 G55 12
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3 G56 12
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4 G57 12
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5 G58 12
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6 G59 12
One-way positioning G60 00
Exact-stop check mode G61 13
Automatic corner override G62 13
Tapping mode G63 13
Cutting mode ▲G64 13
.
d
User macro single call G65 00
ve
User macro modal call A G66 14
ers
User macro modal call B G66.1 14
re
User macro modal call OFF ▲G67 14
ts
Finishing cycle G70 09
gh
Longitudinal roughing cycle G71 09
ri
ll
Transverse roughing cycle G72 09
.A
Contour-parallel roughing cycle G73 09
N
Longitudinal cut-off cycle G74 09
O
TI
Transverse cut-off cycle G75 09
43
PO
K
ri
ZA
2-11
Serial No. 269443
2 DATA FORMATS
Notes:
1. The codes marked with ▲ are automatically selected in each group upon switching-on or
resetting with initializing the modal conditions.
2. The codes marked with ! are able to be selected by a parameter as an initial modal
condition which is to become valid upon switching-on or resetting with initializing the modal
conditions. Changeover of inch/metric system, however, can be made valid only by
switching-on.
3. G-codes of group 00 are those which are not modal, and they are valid only for blocks in
which they are entered.
4. If a G-code not given in the G-code list is used, an alarm is displayed. And if a G-code
.
without corresponding option is used, an alarm is displayed (808 MIS-SET G CODE).
d
ve
5. If G-codes belong to different groups each other, any G-code can be used in the same block.
ser
The G-codes are then processed in order of increasing group number. If two or more G-
re
codes belonging to the same group are given in the same block, the G-code entered last is
ts
valid.
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-12 E
Serial No. 269443
BUFFER REGISTERS 3
3 BUFFER REGISTERS
1. Overview
During tape operation or RS-232C operation, when the preread buffer becomes empty, the
contents of the input buffer will be immediately shifted into the pre-read buffer and, following this,
if the memory capacity of the input buffer diminuishes to 248 × 4 characters or less, next data (up
to 248 characters) will be preread from the tape and then stored into the input buffer.
The input buffer makes block-to-block connections smooth by eliminating any operational delays
.
due to the tape-reading time of the tape reader.
d
ve
These favorable results of prereading, however, will be obtained only if the execution time of the
er
block is longer than the tape-reading time of the next block.
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
Preread
Tape Input buffer
buffer 5
N
O
TI
Buffer 4
43
Mode
A
R
94
Memory selection
PO
Buffer 3
26
R
o.
Buffer 2
N
Keyboard
al
Arithmetic
K
ri
operation
ZA
Buffer 1
MDI data
Se
process
A
IM
K
Note:
ZA
TEP010
YA
3
2. Detailed description
01
)2
- The memory capacity of the input buffer is 248 × 5 characters (including the EOB code).
(c
- The contents of the input buffer register are updated in 248-character units.
ht
ig
- Only the significant codes in the significant information area are read into the buffer.
yr
- Codes, including “(” and “)”, that exist between Control Out and Control In, are read into the
op
C
input buffer. Even if optional block skip is valid, codes from / to EOB will also be read into the
input buffer.
- The contents of the buffer are cleared by a reset command.
3-1
Serial No. 269443
3 BUFFER REGISTERS
1. Overview
During automatic operation, one block of data is usually preread to ensure smooth analysis of
the program. During tool nose radius compensation, however, maximal five blocks of data are
preread to calculate crossing point or to check the interference.
2. Detailed description
- One block of data is stored into the prepared buffer.
- Only the significant codes in the significant information area are read into the pre-read buffer.
d.
ve
- Codes existing between Control Out and Control In are not read into the pre-read buffer. If
er
optional block skip is valid, codes from / to EOB will not also be read into the pre-read buffer.
s
re
- The contents of the buffer are cleared by a reset command.
ts
gh
- If the single block operation mode is selected during continuous operation, processing will stop
ri
after pre-reading the next block data.
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-2 E
Serial No. 269443
POSITION PROGRAMMING 4
4 POSITION PROGRAMMING
.
Z-axis Address Z
d
Absolute data
ve
- Absolute and incremental data can be used together
C-aixs Address C
in the same block.
er
Y-aixs Address Y
s
- Address of incremental data input for A- and B-axes
re
X-axis Address U does not exist.
ts
Z-axis Address W
gh
Incremental data
C-aixs Address H
ri
Y-aixs Address V
ll
.A
Example: X_____ W_____ ;
N
O
Incremental data input for the Z-axis
TI
43
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
4-1
Serial No. 269443
4 POSITION PROGRAMMING
2. Programming format
G20: Inch command selection
G21: Metric command selection
3. Detailed description
d .
1. Changeover between G20 and G21 is effective only for linear axes; it is meaningless for
ve
er
rotational axes.
s
Preset unit of data input and G20/G21 (for decimal-point input type Ι)
re
Example:
ts
gh
Initial Inch (parameter) OFF Initial Inch (parameter) ON
Axis Example
ri
G21 G20 G21 G20
ll
X X100 0.0100 mm 0.0254 mm 0.00039 inches 0.00100 inches
.A
Y Y100 0.0100 mm 0.0254 mm 0.00039 inches 0.00100 inches
N
O
Z Z100 0.0100 mm 0.0254 mm 0.00039 inches 0.00100 inches
TI
B B100 0.0100 deg 0.0100 deg 0.0100 deg 0.0100 deg
43
A
R
94
PO
2. To perform G20/G21 changeover in a program, you must first convert variables, parameters,
26
and offsetting data (such as tool length/tool position/tool diameter offsetting data) according
R
o.
to the unit of data input for the desired system (inch or metric) and then set all these types of
N
data either on each data setting display or using the programmed parameter input function.
al
K
ri
ZA
Example: If Initial inch selection is OFF and offsetting data is 0.05 mm, the offsetting data
Se
must be converted to 0.002 (0.05 ÷ 25.4 ≈ 0.002) before changing the G21
IM
3. In principle, G20/G21 selection should be done before machining. If you want this
ZA
changeover to be performed in the middle of the program, temporarily stop the program by
A
M
an M00 command after G20 or G21 and convert the offsetting data as required.
YA
M M
01
M M
)2
M M
(c
M
yr
F10 →
op
Note: Do not fail to give an F command appropriate to the new unit system after
changeover between G20 and G21. Otherwise, axis movements would be
performed using the last F value before the changeover, without any conversion,
on the basis of the new unit system.
4. Whether G20 or G21 is to be selected upon switching-on can be specified by the bit 4 of
user parameter F91 (Initial Inch parameter).
4-2
Serial No. 269443
POSITION PROGRAMMING 4
2. Programming format
!!!!!.!!!! Metric system
!!!!.!!!!! Inch system
d .
3. Detailed description
ve
er
1. Decimal-point commands are valid only for the distance, angle, time, speed, and scaling
s
re
factor (only after G51) that have been set in the machining program.
ts
2. As listed in the table below, the meaning of command data without the decimal point differs
gh
between decimal-point input types Ι and ΙΙ according to the type of command unit system.
ri
ll
Command Command unit × 10 Type Ι Type ΙΙ
.A
OFF 0.0001 (mm, inches, deg) 1.0000 (mm, inches, deg)
N
X1
O
ON 0.0010 (mm, inches, deg) 1.0000 (mm, inches, deg)
TI
43
3.
A
Decimal-point commands are only valid for addresses X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, E, F,
R
94
PO
R
o.
4. The number of effective digits for each type of decimal-point command is as follows:
O
N
C
al
(Linear) (Rotational)
ZA
Se
Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part
A
IM
mm 0. - 99999. .0000 - .9999 0. - 99999. .0000 - .9999 0. - 200000. .0000 - .9999 0. - 99999. .000 - .999
K
.99999 .99999
A
M
5. Decimal-point commands are also valid for definition of variables data used in subprograms.
YA
6. For data which can be, but is not specified with the decimal point, either the minimum
3
program data input unit or mm (or in) unit can be selected using bit 5 of parameter F91.
01
)2
7. A decimal-point command issued for an address which does not accept the decimal point
(c
will be processed as data that consists of an integral part only. That is, all decimal digits will
ht
be ignored. Addresses that do not accept the decimal point are D, H, L, M, N, O, S and T. All
ig
types of variables command data are handled as the data having the decimal point.
yr
op
C
4-3
Serial No. 269443
4 POSITION PROGRAMMING
4. Sample programs
Command category
For 1 = 1 µm For 1 = 0.1 µm 1 = 1 mm
Program example
G0X123.45
(With the decimal point always given X123.450 mm X123.450 mm X123.450 mm
as the millimeter point)
G0X12345 X12.345 mm* X1.2345 mm** X12345.000 mm***
#111=123 #112=5.55 X123.000 mm
X#111 Y#112 Y5.550 mm
d .
#113=#111+#112 (ADD)
ve
#113 = 128.550
er
#114=#111–#112 (SUBTRACT) #114 = 117.450
s
re
#115=#111#112 (MULTIPLY) #115 = 682.650
ts
#116=#111/#112 #116 = 22.162
gh
#117=#112/#111 (DIVIDE) #117 = 0.045
ri
* The least significant digit is given in 1 µm.
ll
** The least significant digit is given in 0.1 µm.
.A
*** The least significant digit is given in 1 mm.
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
4-4
Serial No. 269443
POSITION PROGRAMMING 4
B. Validity of decimal point for each address
Decimal Decimal
Address point Application Remarks Address point Application Remarks
command command
Rotary table
A Invalid Invalid Dwell time
Miscellaneous function code
.
Miscellaneous function code
d
ve
Valid Coordinate position data Valid Scaling factor
er
Rotary table
s
C Invalid Valid Rank for NURBS curve
re
Miscellaneous function code
ts
Cutting depth for
Valid Corner chamfering amount Valid
gh
deep-hole drilling cycle
Offset number (tool position,
ri
D Invalid Q Valid Shift amount for back boring
tool length and tool radius)
ll
.A
E Valid Valid Shift amount for fine boring
N
O
F Valid Feed rate Valid R point in fixed cycle
TI
Radius of an arc with R
43
Invalid R Valid
26
Intra-subprogram sequence
o.
number
N
C
al
I
ZA
X
)2
Fixed cycle/subprogram
L Invalid Valid Dwell time
repetition
(c
ht
Note: The decimal point is valid in all the arguments for a user macroprogram.
4-5
Serial No. 269443
4 POSITION PROGRAMMING
2. Programming format
G122........... Polar coordinate input ON (G-code group No. 18)
G123........... Polar coordinate input OFF (G-code group No. 18)
d .
ve
3. Detailed description
er
Even in the mode of polar coordinate input, positional commands for the axes that have no
s
re
relation to the polar coordinate interpolation are available as ordinary commands.
ts
gh
In the mode of polar coordinate input, the length must always be designated in radius values,
ri
regardless of the modal state for radius/diameter data input (G122.1/G123.1). This also applies
ll
to the axes that have no relation to the polar coordinate interpolation.
.A
The last modal state for radius/diameter data input before the G122 command will be restored
N
O
automatically by the cancel command G123.
TI
43
4. Sample program
A
R
94
PO
G01 X50.C30.F100;
N
C
al
G02 X50.C60.R50;
K
ri
ZA
5. Remarks
K
ZA
1. Enter polar coordinates with respect to the plane of polar coordinate interpolation.
A
M
2. Positive values (+) for angle data refer to measurement in the counterclockwise direction on
YA
3. Use address R to designate the radius for circular interpolation (G02 or G03).
01
)2
4. If the G122 command is given without selecting the mode of polar coordinate interpolation
(c
5. If the polar coordinate interpolation mode is cancelled (by G13.1) during polar coordinate
ig
input, the mode of polar coordinate input will be cancelled together with the mode of polar
yr
op
coordinate interpolation.
C
6. G122 and G123 must be given in an independent block. That is, the block of G122 or G123
must not contain any other G-codes or addresses with the exception of N and P.
7. The following G-codes are available during polar coordinate input. An alarm will occur if any
G-code other than these is specified.
Available G-codes
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation
G02 Circular interpolation (CW)
4-6
Serial No. 269443
POSITION PROGRAMMING 4
G03 Circular interpolation (CCW)
G04 Dwell
G09 Exact-stop check
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G40-G42 Nose radius/Tool radius compensation
G61 Exact-stop check mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 User macro single call
G66 User macro modal call A
G66.1 User macro modal call B
G67 User macro modal call OFF
.
G80-G89 Fixed cycles for hole machining
d
ve
G98 Asynchronous feed
er
G123 Polar coordinate input OFF
s
re
ts
4-5 X-axis Radial Command ON/OFF: G122.1/G123.1
gh
ri
1. Function and purpose
ll
.A
The X-axis dimensions can be entered in radial values, instead of diametrical ones, by the aid of
N
a preparatory function (G-code) in order to improve EIA/ISO programming efficiency for milling.
O
TI
43
2. Programming format A
R
94
PO
G123.1........ X-axis radial data input OFF (G-code group No. 25)
o.
O
N
3. Detailed description
al
K
ri
ZA
All the X-axis dimensions entered after G122.1 are processed as radial values until the
Se
command G123.1 is given for the restoration of diametrical data input mode for the X-axis.
IM
4. Sample program
K
ZA
M
3
......Radial dimension
)2
M
(c
M
ig
M
op
C
5. Remarks
1. The counter indication on the POSITION display always refers to a diametrical value even in
the mode of G122.1.
2. The selection of the G122.1 mode does not exercise any influence upon parameters, offset
values, etc.
3. G123.1 is selected as the initial mode when the power is turned on.
4. Resetting causes the mode of G122.1 to be canceled and replaced by the G123.1 mode.
4-7
Serial No. 269443
4 POSITION PROGRAMMING
5. Even in the G122.1 mode the X-axis dimensions entered under the following modal
functions are always processed as diametrical values. Issuance of these G-code commands
also cancels G122.1 mode:
G7.1 Cylindrical interpolation
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation ON
G123 Polar coordinate input OFF
G22 Pre-move stroke check ON
6. Even in the G123.1 mode the X-axis dimensions entered under the following modal
functions are always processed as radial values (with diametrical indication on the
POSITON display):
G122 Polar coordinate input ON
.d
ve
7. Various settings for software limits and barrier functions are not to be changed.
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
4-8 E
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2. Programming format
d.
Where x, u, z, w and α denote a coordinate.
ve
er
The command addresses are valid for all additional axis.
s
re
3. Detailed description
ts
gh
1. Once this command has been given, the G00 mode will be retained until any other G-code
ri
command that overrides this mode, that is, either G01, G02, G03, or G32 of command
ll
group 01 is given. Thus, a coordinate word will only need be given if the next command is
.A
also G00. This function is referred to the modal function of the command.
N
O
2. In the G00 mode, acceleration/deceleration always takes place at the starting/ending point
TI
43
of a block and the program proceeds to the next block after confirming that the pulse
A
R
94
command in the present block is 0 and the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration
PO
26
3. The G-code functions (G83 to G89) of command group 09 are canceled by the G00
N
command (G80).
al
K
ri
ZA
4. The tool path can be made either linear or polygonal using a parameter (F91 bit 6) but the
Se
- Linear path
K
As with linear interpolation (G01), the tool speed is limited according to the rate of rapid
ZA
The tool is positioned according to the separate rate of rapid traverse of each axis.
3
5-1
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4. Sample programs
+X
Chuck Jaw
Starting point
Ending point (+180, +300)
Workpiece (+100, +150)
+Z
.
(Unit: mm)
d
ve
er
TEP012’
s
re
The diagram above is for:
ts
G00 X100.000 Z150.000; Absolute data command
gh
G00 U–80.000 W–150.000; Incremental data command
ri
ll
.A
5. Remarks
N
1. If bit 6 of user parameter F91 is 0, the tool will take the shortest path connecting the starting
O
TI
and ending points. The positioning speed will be calculated automatically to give the
43
A
shortest allocation time within the limits of the rapid feed rate of each axis.
R
94
PO
When, for example, with the rate of rapid traverse being set to 9600 mm/min for both the X-
26
O
N
ZA
Se
F91 bit 6 = 0
A
IM
400
fx
YA
X
3
01
300
)2
fz Z
(c
Starting point
ht
(Unit: mm)
Z-axis effective feedrate: 9600 mm/min
ig
TEP013
yr
op
For inch-specification machines, the rapid traverse rate of the C-axis is limited to 89 min–1
C
5-2
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
2. If bit 6 of user parameter F91 is 1, the tool will move from the starting point to the ending
point according to the rate of rapid traverse of each axis concerned.
When, for example, with the rate of rapid traverse being set to 9600 mm/min for both the X-
and Z-axes, the following command is given:
G00 Z–300.000 X400.000;
then the tool will move as shown in the diagram below.
F91 bit 6 = 1
.d
400
ve
fx
er
X
s
re
ts
300
gh
Z
fz Starting point
ri
(Unit: mm)
ll
Z-axis effective feedrate: 9600 mm/min
.A
TEP014
N
O
3. The rate of rapid traverse to be used for G00 commands varies from machine to machine.
TI
43
When processing of rapid traverse (G00) is completed, the next block will be executed after
R
o.
The deceleration check time (Td) is calculated by following expressions depending on the
al
K
ri
acceleration/deceleration type.
ZA
Se
The time required for the deceleration check during rapid traverse is the longest among the
M
YA
times of each axis determined by the time constants and types of rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration of the axes concerned.
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
5-3
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2. Programming format
G60 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww αα; (α: Additional axis)
.
3. Detailed description
d
ve
1. The direction of final access and its creeping distance must be set in parameter I1.
s er
2. After rapid approach to a position away from the ending point by the creeping distance, the
re
final access is performed in the predetermined direction at a speed corresponding with the
ts
gh
rapid traverse.
ri
ll
G60 a Positioning point
.A
N
Final access direciton
O
TI
43
(–)
A Ending point Starting point (+)
R
94
PO
26
Starting point
Temporary stop
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
MEP018
IM
3. The positioning pattern described above also applies during machine locking or for a Z-axis
K
ZA
4. In the dry run mode (G00 mode), the whole positioning is carried out at the dry-running
M
speed.
YA
5. The creeping to the einding point can be halted with Reset, Emergency stop, Interlock, or
3
01
The creeping is performed according to the setting of the rapid traverse, and the function of
(c
overriding the rapid traverse rate is also effective for the creeping.
ht
fixed-cycle operations.
8. Usual positioning is performed for an axis not having a parameter-set creeping distance.
9. One-way positioning is always of non-interpolation type.
10. An axis movement command for the same position as the ending point of the preceding
block (movement distance = 0) will cause reciprocation through the creeping distance so
that the final access can be performed in the predetermined direction for an accurate
positioning to the desired point.
5-4
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
2. Programming format
.
d
ve
where x, u, z, w and α each denote a coordinate.
er
s
re
X-axis
ts
z w
gh
ri
Command point
ll
.A
N
u
2
O
Current position
TI
43
A Z-axis
R
94
x
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
TEP015
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
3. Detailed description
A
IM
Once this command has been given, the G01 mode will be retained until any other G-code
command that overrides this mode, that is, either G00, G02, G03 or G32 of command group 01
K
ZA
is given. Thus, it is merely required to input coordinate words for linear interpolations in the
A
A programming error will result if an F-code command is not given to the first G01 command.
YA
The feed rates for rotational axes must be set in deg/min. (Example : F300 = 300 deg/min)
3
The G-code functions (G70 to G89) of command group 09 are cancelled by G01 (set to G80).
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
5-5
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4. Sample program
Example 1: Taper turning
X-axis
20.0
Current position
.d
Z-axis
ve
50.0
s er
re
ts
TEP016
gh
ri
G01 X50.0 Z20.0 F300;
ll
.A
Example 2: Program for moving the tool at a cutting feed rate of 300 mm/min via the route of
N
P1→P2 →P3 →P4 (where the sections P0→P1 and P4 →P0 form a positioning route
O
TI
for the tool):
43
A
R
94
PO
26
Turret +X
R
o.
O
N
240
P0
al
P1
K
ri
200 +Z
ZA
Se
140
P4 Unit: mm
IM
100
P2 P3
K
ZA
A
M
TEP017
3
01
P2 → P3
ht
Z160.000;
P3 → P4
ig
X140.000 Z220.000;
yr
5-6
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
2. Programming format
G02 (G03) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww (Yy/Vv) Ii Kk (Jj) Ff ;
Coordinates of the Coordinates of Feedrate
ending point the arc center
Counterclockwise(CCW)
. d
Clockwise (CW)
ve
er
X/U: Arc ending point coordinates, X-axis (absolute value of workpiece coordinate system for X,
s
incremental value from present position for U)
re
Z/W: Arc ending point coordinates, Z-axis (absolute value of workpiece coordinate system for Z,
ts
gh
incremental value from present position for W)
ri
Y/V: Arc ending point coordinates, Y-axis (absolute value of workpiece coordinate system for Y,
ll
incremental value from present position for V)
.A
I : Arc center, X-axis (radius command, incremental value from starting point)
N
O
K : Arc center, Z-axis (incremental value from starting point)
TI
J : Arc center, Y-axis (incremental value from starting point)
43
F : Feed rate
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
Center
al
X-axis
K
ri
ZA
Se
Ending point
A
IM
i
u
K
Starting
2
ZA
point
A
z w k
M
YA
x
Z-axis
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
TEP018
5-7
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
For machines with Y-axis control, arc interpolation is, additionally to ZX-plane, also available for
XY- and YZ-planes.
XY-plane G17;
G02 (G03) X_Y_I_J_F_; For milling on the face
ZX-plane G18;
G02 (G03) X_Z_I_K_F_; For normal turning
YZ-plane G19;
G02 (G03) Y_Z_J_K_F_; For Y-axis milling on OD surface
3. Detailed description
d .
1. Once the G02 (or G03) command has been given, this command mode will be retained until
ve
any other G-code command used to override the G02 (or G03) command mode, that is, G00
er
or G01 of command group 01 is given.
s
re
2. The direction of circular movement is determined by G02/G03.
ts
gh
G02: CW (Clockwise)
ri
G03: CCW (Counterclockwise)
ll
.A
N
O
+X Turret
TI
Chuck +X
CCW (G03)
43
A
R
94
CW (G02)
PO
+Z
26
R
o.
O
N
Work- +Z
al
piece
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
TEP019
ZA
A
3. Interpolation of an arc that spans multiple quadrants can be defined with one block.
M
YA
6. Addresses I, K and J are used to specify the coordinates of the arc center in the X, Z and Y
C
directions respectively as seen from the starting point, therefore, care must be taken for
signs.
5-8
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
4. Sample programs
X-axis
50.0
Coordinate
zero point 120.0
20.0 Z-axis
.d
ve
70.0 50.0
s er
TEP020
re
ts
G02 X120.0 Z70.0 I50.0 F200; Absolute data setting
gh
G02 U100.0 W–50.0 I50.0 F200; Incremental data setting
ri
ll
.A
5. Notes on circular interpolation
N
1. Clockwise (G02) or Counterclockwise (G03) during circular interpolation refers to the
O
TI
rotational direction in the right-handed coordinate system when seen from the plus side
43
A
toward the minus side of the coordinate axis perpendicular to the plane to be interpolated.
R
94
PO
2. If the coordinates of the ending point are not set or if the starting and ending points are set
26
at the same position, designating the center using address I, K or J will result in an arc of
R
o.
C
al
3. The following will result if the starting-point radius and the ending-point radius are not the
ri
ZA
same.
Se
- If error ∆R is larger than the parameter F19 (tolerance for radial value difference at ending
IM
point), a program error (817 INCORRECT ARC DATA) will occur at the starting point of
K
the arc.
ZA
A
M
YA
G02 Z80.K50.;
3
+X
01
)2
(c
ht
Alarm stop
ig
yr
Starting
point Radius at Radius at
C
+Z
TEP021
5-9
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
- If error ∆R is equal to or smaller than the parameter data, interpolation will take a spiral
form heading for the programmed ending point of the arc.
G02 Z90.K50.;
+X Spiral interpolation
Ending
Starting Center point
.d
point
ve
Radius at Radius at
starting point ending point ∆R
ser
+Z
re
TEP022
ts
gh
The examples shown above assume that excessively large parameter data is given to
ri
facilitate your understanding.
ll
.A
5-5 Radius Designated Circular Interpolation: G02, G03
N
O
TI
43
Circular interpolation can be performed by designating directly the arc radius R as well as using
PO
26
O
N
2. Programming format
al
K
ri
ZA
f: Feed rate
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
5-10
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
3. Detailed description
The arc center is present on the mid-perpendicular to the segment which connects the starting
point and the ending point. The crossing point of the mid-perpendicular and that circle of the
designated radius r that has the center set at the starting point gives the center coordinates of
the designated arc.
A semi-circle or smaller will be generated if R is a positive value.
An arc larger than the semi-circle will be generated if R is a negative value.
.
d
ve
Ending point
er
O2
s
re
Path of an arc with a positive R
ts
gh
O1
ri
L O1, O2 : Center point
ll
Starting point r
.A
N
O
TEP023
TI
43
To use the radius-designated arc interpolation commands, the following requirement must be
A
R
94
met:
PO
26
L
≤1
R
o.
2•r
O
N
where L denotes the length of the line from the starting point to the ending point.
al
K
ri
ZA
If radius data and arc center data (I, J, K) are both set in the same block, the circular interpolation
Se
For complete-circle interpolation (the ending point = the starting point), however, use center-
designation method with addresses I, J and K, since the radius-specification command in this
K
ZA
4. Sample programs
YA
(If radius data and center data (I, K, J) are set in the same block, circular interpolation by
(c
5-11
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
5-6-1 Outline
1. Function and purpose
Commands G17, G18 and G19 are used to select a plane on which arc interpolation, tool nose
radius compensation, etc. are to be done.
Registering the three fundamental axes as parameters allows you to select a plane generated by
any two non-parallel axes.
The available planes are the following three types:
.d
- Plane for circular interpolation
ve
er
- Plane for tool nose radius compensation
s
re
- Plane for polar coordinate interpolation
ts
2. Programming format
gh
ri
G17; (XY-plane selection)
X, Y, and Z denote respective coordinate axes
ll
G18; (ZX-plane selection)
.A
or their corresponding parellel axes.
G19; (YZ-plane selection)
N
O
TI
43
Y X A Z
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
ZA
Se
X Z Y
A
TEP024’
ZA
A
1. Which of the fundamental axes or their parallel axes are to form the plane you want to select
01
is determined by the type of plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) and the axis
)2
X Z Y
TEP025’
5-12
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
2. Automatic plane selection does not occur for blocks that do not have an issued plane-
selection command (G17, G18 or G19)
G18 X_ Z_; ZX-plane
Y_ Z_; ZX-plane (No plane change)
3. If axis addresses are not set for blocks having an issued plane-selection command (G17,
G18 or G19), the fundamental three axes will be regarded as set.
G18_; (ZX-plane = G18 XZ ;)
Note 1: The plane that is automatically selected upon power on or resetting depends on the
settings of bits 0 and 1 of parameter F92 as follows:
bit 1 bit 0 Plane selected
d.
ve
0 0 G17 plane
er
0 1 G18 plane
s
re
1 0 G19 plane
ts
1 1 G18 plane
gh
Note 2: In turning mode, G17 or G19 plane selection is impossible and in milling mode, G18
ri
plane selection respectively.
ll
.A
If such selection were attempted, alarm would be caused.
N
Note 3: The G-codes for plane selection (G17, G18 or G19) should be commanded in a block
O
TI
independently. If such a G-code is commanded in a block containing the axis move
43
A
command, a movement independent from the selected plane can be caused.
R
94
PO
26
O
N
C
al
ZA
Se
It is available for face helical grooving or cam shaft grinding on the lathe.
A
It is a function to convert a command programmed by the rectangular coordinate system into the
IM
linear axis movement (tool movement) and the rotational axis movement (workpiece rotation) to
K
2. Programming format
M
YA
The polar coordinate interpolation is commanded by the following G-codes (group 26).
3
G12.1: Polar coordinate interpolation mode (Mode by which the polar coordinate is inter-
01
polated)
)2
(c
G13.1: Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode (Mode by which the polar coordinate is not
ht
interpolated)
ig
3. Detailed description
C
1. The block of G12.1 must be preceded by a command of selecting the appropriate plane
(G17UH); otherwise an alarm will be caused (1802 ILLEGAL STARTUP CONDITION
G12.1). When turning on the power and resetting, the polar coordinate interpolation cancel
mode (G13.1) is provided.
5-13
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2. The polar coordinate interpolation uses the zero point of workpiece coordinate system as
that of the coordinate system. A plane (hereinafter referred to as “polar coordinate inter-
polation plane”) is selected using the linear axis as the 1st axis of the plane and the virtual
axis perpendicular to the linear axis as the 2nd axis of the plane. The polar coordinate
interpolation is given on that plane.
3. The program during polar coordinate interpolation mode is commanded by the rectangular
coordinate value on the polar coordinate interpolation plane. The axis address of the
rotational axis (C) is used for that of the command of the 2nd axis of the plane (virtual axis).
A command is given in mm or inches as with the 1st axis of the plane (command by the axis
address of the linear axis), and not in degrees. And whether designation is given by the
diameter or by the radius is not determined by the 1st axis of the plane, but the designation
d .
is the same as the rotational axis.
ve
er
4. Absolute command and incremental command for the linear interpolation (G01) and the
s
re
circular interpolation (G02, G03) can be commanded during the polar coordinate inter-
ts
polation mode.
gh
The nose radius compensation can also be made for the program command, and the polar
ri
coordinate interpolation is given to the path after the nose radius compensation. However,
ll
.A
the polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1, G13.1) cannot be changed during the nose
radius compensation mode (G41, G42). G12.1 and G13.1 must be commanded in G40
N
O
mode (Nose radius compensation cancel mode).
TI
43
5. The feed rate is commanded using tangential speed (relative speed of the workpiece and a
A
R
94
6. The coordinate value of the virtual axis when G12.1 is commanded provides “0”. That is, the
N
polar coordinate interpolation is started taking the position where G12.1 is commanded as
al
K
ri
ZA
the angle = 0.
Se
A
IM
C
YA
3
Z
01
)2
(c
C
ht
(Virtual axis)
ig
yr
D732S0008
op
C
5-14
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
4. Sample programs
C (Virtual axis)
N070
.
d
ve
N080 N060
N050
er
X
s
re
N100
ts
gh
ri
N090
ll
.A
Nose radius
center path
N
O
Programmed path
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
D732S0009
26
R
o.
M
O
N
K
ri
N008 M200;
A
IM
N010 T001000;
N020 G00 X100.0 Z10.0 C0.0; Positioning to the start point
K
ZA
N040 G42;
YA
N060 C10.0;
01
N120 G40;
C
5-15
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
5. Notes
1. Before G12.1 is commanded, a workpiece coordinate system must be set using the center
of rotational axis as the zero point of the coordinate system. The coordinate system must
not be changed during G12.1 mode.
2. The method of commanding the circular radius (which address of I, J and K is used) when
the circular interpolation (G02, G03) is given on the polar coordinate interpolation plane
depends on which axis of the basic coordinate system the 1st axis of the plane (linear axis)
corresponds to.
- Command is given by I and J taking the linear axis as the X-axis of XpYp-plane.
- Command is given by J and K taking the linear axis as the Y-axis of YpZp-plane.
d.
- Command is given by K and I taking the linear aixs as the Z-axis of ZpXp-plane.
ve
The circular radius can also be designated by R command.
ser
3. G-codes capable of command during G12.1 mode are G04, G65, G66, G67, G00, G01, G02,
re
G03, G98, G99, G40, G41 and G42.
ts
gh
4. Move command of an axis other than those on the selected plane during G12.1 mode is
ri
executed independently of the polar coordinate interpolation.
ll
.A
5. Tool offset must be commanded in the polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode before
N
G12.1 is commanded. It cannot be commanded during the polar coordinate interpolation
O
mode. Offset amount must not be changed during the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
TI
43
PO
Every current position during the polar coordinate interpolation mode is displayed with an
26
actual coordinate value. However, only “residue moving distance” (REMAIN) is displayed
R
o.
with the residue moving distance on the polar coordinate command plane.
N
C
al
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
5-16
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
2. Programming format
. d
G07 α0 To set a virtual axis
ve
M To interpolate with the virtual axis
er
G07 α1
s
To cancel the virtual axis
re
ts
3. Detailed description
gh
ri
1. Only helical interpolation can be used for the virtual-axis interpolation.
ll
.A
2. In the program section from G07α0 to G07α1, the “alpha” axis is processed as a virtual axis.
If, therefore, the alpha axis is included independently in this section, the machine will remain
N
O
in dwell status until pulse distribution to the virtual axis is completed.
TI
43
3. The virtual axis is valid only for automatic operation; it is invalid for manual operation.
A
R
94
PO
4. Protective functions, such as interlock, stored stroke limit, etc., are valid even for the virtual
26
axis.
R
o.
O
N
5. Handle interruption is also valid for the virtual axis. That is, the virtual axis can be shifted
C
al
ZA
Se
4. Sample program
A
IM
X-axis
X-axis
3
01
)2
10.
(c
ht
5.
ig
Z-axis 40.
yr
Y-axis
C
–5.
–10.
MEP037
5-17
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2. Programming format
G07.1 C_; Cylindrical interpolation mode (C: cylindrical radius)
.d
G07.1 C0; Cylindrical interpolation cancel mode
ve
(These G-codes should be commanded in an independent block.)
s er
re
* When the cylindrical radius (address C) is not commanded, a cylinder is defined taking as
radius current value of X-axis (treated as radius value) when G07.1 is commanded.
ts
gh
ri
3. Operation
ll
.A
+C
N
+X
O
TI
l 360°
43
A
R
94
PO
26
r
R
C
o.
180° 2πr
O
N
+Z
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
0° l +Z
D732S0010
K
ZA
The moving distance of rotational axis commanded with an angle is converted to the linear
A
M
distance on the circumference in CNC. After the conversion, linear interpolation or circular inter-
YA
polation is given with the other axis. After the interpolation, the calculated movement is converted
again to the moving distance of rotational axis.
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
5-18
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
4. Sample programs
In case of the figure on the right: P0→P1→P2→P3→P4→P5→P6→P7 (r = 50 mm)
G00 G98; +C
P7
G28 U0 W0; Unit:mm 360
T001001;
M200;
G18 W0 H0;
P6
X52. M203 S1000; P4 P5 280
G01 X40.F100; 270
G07.1 C50.;
G01 C80.F100; P0 → P1 225
.
P3
d
G03 Z-25.C90.R50.; P1 → P2
ve
P2 → P3
er
G01 Z-80.C225.;
P3 → P4
s
G02 Z-75.C270.R55.;
re
G01 Z-25.; P4 → P5
ts
G03 Z-20.C280.R80.; P5 → P6
gh
G01 C360.; P6 → P7
ri
P2 90
G07.1 C0.; 80
ll
P1
.A
G28 U0;
N
G28 W0 H0;
O
M202; P0
TI
+Z
43
PO
26
5. Supplement
R
o.
O
N
K
ri
ZA
The feed rate commanded during cylindrical interpolation mode provides a speed on the plane
IM
M
ZA
G01 C_ F10;
3
M
01
1. Plane selection
ht
Giving the circular interpolation between the rotational axis and other linear axis during
ig
cylindrical interpolation mode requires the command of plane selection (G17, G18, G19).
yr
op
Example: When the circular interpolation is given between Z- and C-axes, the circular
C
interpolation command is
G18 Z_ C_ ;
G02/G03 Z_ C_ R_ ;
2. Radius designation
The circular radius by word address I, J or K cannot be commanded during cylindrical inter-
polation mode. The circular radius is commanded by address R. The radius must be
commanded not with angle, but with mm or inch.
5-19
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
D. Positioning
Positioning (including commands producing the cycle of rapid feed such as G28 and G80 to
G89) cannot be accomplished during cylindrical interpolation mode. Positioning requires
establishing a cylindircal interpolation cancel mode.
d.
ve
E. Coordinate system setting
ser
re
The workpiece coordinate system (G50) cannot be commanded during cylindrical interpolation
mode.
ts
gh
ri
6. Notes
ll
.A
1. The cylindrical interpolation mode cannot be re-established during cylindrical interpolation
mode. Re-establishment requires the cancel of cylindrical interpolation mode.
N
O
2. The cylindrical interpolation (G07.1) cannot be commanded during positioning mode (G00).
TI
43
3. Accuracy A
R
94
PO
- Automatic operation
26
During cylindrical interpolation mode, the moving distance of rotational axis commanded
o.
O
N
with an angle is once internally converted to the distance on the circumference. And after
C
al
ZA
As a result, where the cylindrical radius is small, the actual moving distance may differ
IM
from the commanded value. However, the error produced then is not accumulated.
K
MOVE 2 × 2πr
ZA
r : Workpiece radius
3
01
- Manual operation
(c
4. The hole machining fixed cycle (G83 to G89) cannot be commanded during cylindrical
op
interpolation mode.
C
5-20
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
5-10 Threading
.
d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
F/E
ll
.A
F/E F/E
N
O
Straight thread Scrolled thread Continuous thread
TI
43
A TEP026
R
94
PO
26
2. Programming format
R
o.
O
N
Where Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu: Thread ending point addresses and coordinates
K
ri
ZA
Ff: Lead of long axis (axis of which moving distance is the longest)
Se
direction
IM
Where Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu: Thread ending point addresses and coordinates
A
Ee: Lead of long axis (axis of which moving distance is the longest)
M
YA
direction
Qq: Shift angle of threading start
3
01
)2
w
(c
X-axis
Ending point
ht
ig
u
yr
2
α
op
Starting point
C
z δ2 δ1
Z-axis
TEP027
5-21
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
3. Detailed description
1. The E command is also used for the number of threads in inch threading, and whether the
thread number or precision lead is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting.
(Bit 7 of address F91 is set to 0 for precision lead designation.)
2. Use an argument Q to specify the shift angle of threading start for multiple-thread cutting.
Omit the argument Q if no shifting of angular position for threading start is required at all
(shift by 0°).
3. The lead in the long axis direction is commanded for the taper thread lead.
.d
Tapered thread section
ve
u
er
2 a°
s
re
w
ts
gh
ri
Z
ll
.A
N
When a < 45° lead is in Z-axis direction.
O
When a > 45° lead is in X-axis direction.
TI
When a = 45° lead can be in either Z- or X-axis direction.
43
A TEP028
R
94
PO
26
Note 1: It is not possible to designate a lead where the feed rate as converted into per-
O
N
K
ri
ZA
Note 2: The converted cutting feed rate is compared with the cutting feed clamp rate when
Se
threading starts, and if it is found to exceed the clamp rate, an alarm will result
A
IM
4. The constant surface speed control function should not be used here.
ZA
5. The spindle speed should be kept constant throughout from the roughing until the finishing.
A
M
6. If the feed hold function is employed to stop the feed during thread cutting, the thread height
YA
will lose their shape. For this reason, feed hold does not function during thread cutting.
3
If the feed hold button is pressed during threading, block stop will result at the ending point
01
of the block following the block in which threading is completed (no longer in G32 mode).
)2
7. An M0 block (for programmed stop) immediately following a threading block will not cause a
(c
ht
stop until completion of the next, non-threading motion block (no longer in G32 mode) so as
ig
8. In order to protect the lead during threading, a converted cutting feed rate may sometimes
op
C
5-22
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
10. The spindle speed is subject to the following restriction:
1 ≤ R ≤ Maximum feed rate/Thread lead
where R : Spindle speed (min–1) ≤ Permissible speed of encoder (min–1)
Thread lead = mm or inches
Maximum feed rate = mm/min or in/min (this is subject to the restrictions imposed
by the machine specifications).
11. During threading, use or disuses of dry run can be specified by setting parameter F111 bit 1.
12. Synchronous feed applies for the threading commands even with an asynchronous feed
mode (G98).
13. Spindle override is valid even during threading. But the override value will not be changed
.
d
during threading.
ve
14. When a threading command is programmed during tool nose radius compensation, the
er
s
compensation is temporarily cancelled and the threading is executed.
re
15. When the mode is switched to another automatic operation mode while G32 is executed,
ts
gh
the following block which does not contain a threading command is first executed and then
ri
the automatic operation stops.
ll
.A
16. When the mode is switched to manual operation mode while G32 is executed, the following
N
block which does not contain a threading command is first executed and then the automatic
O
operation stops. In the case of the single block operation, the following block which does not
TI
43
contain a threading command is first executed and then the automatic operation stops.
A
R
94
17. The threading command waits for the single rotation synchronization signal of the rotary
PO
26
With this NC unit, however, movement starts without waiting for this signal when another
N
K
ri
4. Sample programs
IM
K
ZA
X-axis
A
M
YA
3
01
20.0 Z-axis
)2
(c
ht
90.0
ig
yr
op
40.0 50.0
C
TEP029
5-23
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2. Programming format
G32 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ee Qq;
Where Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu: Thread ending point addresses and coordinates
.
d
Ee: Number of threads per inch in direction of long axis (axis of which the
ve
moving distance is the longest)
er
s
(Decimal point command can also be assigned.)
re
Qq: Shift angle of threading start
ts
gh
ri
X-axis w
ll
Ending point
.A
N
u
O
2
α
TI
Starting point
43
z δ2
A
δ1
R
94
PO
Z-axis
26
x
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
TEP030
K
3. Detailed description
ZA
A
1. The number of threads in the long axis direction is assigned as the number of threads per
M
inch.
YA
2. The E code is also used to assign the precision lead length, and whether the thread number
3
01
3. The E command value should be set within the lead value range when converted to the
ht
lead.
ig
yr
4. Use an argument Q to specify the shift angle of threading start for multiple-thread cutting.
op
Omit the argument Q if no shifting of angular position for threading start is required at all
C
(shift by 0°).
5. See Subsection 5-10-1 on “Constant lead threading” for further details.
5-24
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
4. Sample programs
X-axis
20.0
Z-axis
90.0
.
d
ve
40.0 50.0
er
TEP031
s
re
ts
G32 X90.0 Z40.0 E12.0; Absolute data command
gh
G32 U70.0 W–50.0 E12.0; Incremental data command
ri
ll
5-10-3 Continuous threading
.A
N
Continous threading is possible by designating threading commands continuously. In this way, it
O
is possible to cut special threads whose lead or shape changes.
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
G32 G32
ZA
G32
A
M
YA
TEP032
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
5-25
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
d.
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
D732S0012
ri
ll
.A
2. Programming format
N
G34 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ff/Ee Kk;
O
TI
It is the same as the case of straight and taper threading of G32 (see Subsections 5-10-1 and -2)
43
except an address K.
A
R
94
PO
A value commanded with K gives the increase or decrease of a lead per screw rotation.
26
O
N
ZA
Se
3. Notes
IM
1. As a result of the increase or decrease of a lead, when exceeding the range of the
K
ZA
command value of screw lead or when cutting feed gets excessively high, the feed rate is
clamped at rapid feed rate.
A
M
5-26
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
5-10-5 Threading with C-axis interpolation: G01.1
2. Programming format
G01.1 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ff Ss;
Where Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu: Thread ending point addresses and coordinates (mm or in)
Ff: Lead of long axis (axis of which moving distance is the longest)
d .
ve
direction
er
Ss: Rotational speed of C-axis (min–1)
s
Set parameter F111 bit 3 to select the direction of C-axis rotation:
re
F111 bit 3 = 0 : Normal rotation of C-axis
ts
gh
= 1 : Reversed rotation of C-axis
ri
3. Detailed description
ll
.A
1. For tapered thread cutting, specify the lead in the long axis direction.
N
O
TI
Straight thread
43
+X Lead
A
R
94
PO
Scrolled thread
26
a U
+Z
R
2
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Lead
Se
Tapered
A
thread Lead
IM
Tapered thread
section
K
ZA
- The maximum speed of C-axis rotation (1/360 of value “C” of parameter M3) depends on
op
- Do not create a program nor operate the overriding keys in such a manner that the
maximum speed of C-axis rotation should be exceeded.
4. During execution of G01.1 command, it is not possible at all to apply feed hold or to change
the override values.
5. The speed of C-axis rotation should be kept constant throughout from roughing till finishing.
6. The number of C-axis revolutions for execution of one G01.1 command must not exceed
298.
5-27
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4. Sample programs
G98 G97;
G28 U0 W0;
T001001;
G50 X300.Z100.;
M200;
G00 X100.Z2.C0.;
G01.1 W-100.F2.S400;(*)
G00 U10.; Chuck Jaw
W100.C0.;
.
U-11.;
d
Workpiece
ve
G01.1 W-100.F2.S400;(*)
er
G00 U11.;
s
re
W100.C0.;
ts
G00 U-12.; +X
gh
G01.1 W-100.F2.S400;(*)
ri
G00 U12.;
ll
+Z
.A
W100.;
N
G28 U0 W0.;
O
M202;
TI
43
M30; A
R
94
(*) Command for threading with C-axis control, 2 mm lead and 400 min–1
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
5-28
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
5-10-6 Automatic correction of threading start position (for overriding in a threading cycle)
.
G00
d
ve
G00
er
G00 Starting point of machining
s
1st threading pass
re
2nd threading pass
ts
Automatic phase correction
gh
Spindle override value for the same angular position
changed during 1st pass
ri
at the start of threading
Overridden speed
ll
.A
validated from 2nd pass Acceleration
distance
N
O
TI
43
2. Related G-codes A
R
94
PO
26
Function G-code
N
K
ri
ZA
thread forming for a speed overriding in the middle of these threading cycles.
YA
3. Detailed description
3
01
5-29
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2. Even in the middle of a threading pass, operating the turning/milling spindle speed
overriding keys immediately changes the speed indication in percentages, indeed, but the
actual speed will not accordingly change till completion of the threading block (or a series of
the threading blocks in the case of “continuous threading”).
G00
G00 G00
.
Starting point as programmed
d
ve
er
Spindle override value changed
s
re
during a threading pass
ts
gh
3. The function for automatic correction of threading start position does not include corre-
ri
sponding adjustment of the acceleration distance for threading. To use an overriding value
ll
above 100%, therefore, specify in the machining program such an acceleration distance as
.A
to allow for the maximum spindle speed.
N
O
4. As for the end of thread, the length of the upward cutting path on the workpiece will become
TI
43
PO
26
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
Root of thread
YA
Changes in the upward cutting path according to the spindle override value
)2
(c
4. Notes
ht
1. This function is not valid for a threading by simultaneous cutting with both (upper and lower)
ig
yr
turrets.
op
2. This function is not valid for a threading by synchronization of both turning spindles.
C
3. This function is only valid for a longitudinal threading (by cutting feed on the Z-axis).
4. After changing the spindle override value the execution of a threading block should not be
started until spindle rotation has been stabilized; otherwise the starting section will only be
cut to an incomplete thread.
5. Do not allow a threading block to be executed with the spindle override value set to 0%;
otherwise the machine operation will be stopped at the beginning of that block.
5-30
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
2. Programming format
G17 G02 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1 ;
Feed rate
(G03)
.
Number of pitches
d
ve
Arc center coordinates
Linear axis ending point coordinate
er
Arc ending point coordinates
s
re
or
ts
gh
G17 G02 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 Rr2 Pp2 Ff2 ;
ri
Feed rate
(G03) Number of pitches
ll
.A
Arc radius
Linear axis ending point
N
Arc ending point coordinates
O
TI
3. Detailed description
43
A
R
94
z1
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
l X
ri
ZA
X
Se
A
IM
θ
θs
θe
K
ZA
Y
A
M
YA
3
Z
01
)2
Y
(c
H734P0001
ht
ig
1. For helical interpolation, movement designation is additionally required for one to two linear
yr
op
2. The velocity in the tangential direction must be designated as the feed rate F.
3. The pitch l is calculated as follows:
z1
l = (2π • p + θ)/2π
1
–1 ye –1 ys
θ = θe – θs = tan – tan (0 ≤ θ < 2π)
xe xs
where (xs, ys): relative coordinates of starting point with respect to the arc center
(xe, ye): relative coordinates of ending point with respect to the arc center
5-31
Serial No. 269443
5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
d .
ve
- ZX-plane circular, Y-axis linear
s er
After setting G02 (or G03) and G18 (plane-selection command), set the axis addresses Z,
re
X and Y.
ts
gh
- YZ-plane circular, X-axis linear
ri
After setting G02 (or G03) and G19 (plane-selection command), set the axis addresses Y,
ll
.A
Z and X.
N
O
4. Sample programs
TI
43
Example 1: A
R
94
PO
G28 U0 W0 Y0; X
26
G50 X0 Z0 Y0;
R
o.
100.
C
al
Ending
ri
ZA
point
Se
–50.
Z
IM
Starting
point
K
50.
ZA
A
H734P0002
M
Y
YA
Example 2:
3
01
G28 U0 W0 Y0;
X
)2
G50 X0 Z0 Y0;
(c
Ending
ig
point
yr
op
–50. Z
C
Starting
point
50.
H734P0003
5-32
Serial No. 269443
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 5
d .
ve
2. Example for comparison with the control using the fixed time constant
ser
Given below is an example to illustrate the difference in positioning time by rapid traverse over
re
distance L between the two control methods.
ts
gh
Rapid traverse rate (M1) = 30000 mm/min, Time constant for rapid traverse (N1) = Ts = 0.3 s
ri
Control using the fixed time constant Control using the fixed gradient
ll
.A
30000 mm/min 30000 mm/min
N
O
TI
Speed
43
Speed
A
R
94
L = 100 L = 100
PO
26
L = 20
R
L = 20
o.
L = 10
O
L = 10
N
0.32
K
0.155
ri
0.34
ZA
0.219
Se
A
IM
3. Remarks
K
The optional function in question works on the correspondingly executed machines when rapid
ZA
traverse of interpolation type by G0 and the fixed gradient control for G0 are made valid by the
A
M
5-33
5
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
ht
(c
)2
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K
5-34 E
94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
FEED FUNCTIONS 6
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
d.
time is the same for both types.
ve
er
6-2 Cutting Feed Rates
s
re
ts
A cutting feed rate must be designated using address F and an eight-digit number (F8-digit direct
gh
designation).
ri
The F8 digits must consist of five integral digits and three decimal digits, with the decimal point.
ll
Cutting feed rates become valid for commands G01, G02, G03, G32 and G34.
.A
N
Example: Rate of feed
O
G01 X100. Y100. F200* 200.0 mm/min
TI
43
O
N
Note: An alarm (No. 713) will result if a feed rate command is not set for the first cutting
C
al
command (G01, G02, G03, G32 or G34) that is read firstly after power-on.
K
ri
ZA
Se
Command G99 allows a feed rate per revolution to be set using an F-code.
A
M
2. Programming format
3
01
Since command G99 is modal, it will remain valid until command G98 is given.
ht
ig
yr
op
C
6-1
Serial No. 269443
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
3. Detailed description
1. Feed rates that can be set using F-codes are listed in the table below.
The table below also lists synchronous feed rates, which are to be set in millimeters (or
inches) per spindle revolution using F-codes.
G98F_ (Feed per minute) G99F_ (Feed per revolution)
Input in mm 1 to 240000 mm/min (F1 to F240000) 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev (F1 to F5000000)
Input in inches 0.01 to 9600.00 in/min (F1 to F960000) 0.000001 to 9.999999 in/rev (F1 to F9999999)
2. The effective feed rate per revolution, that is, the actual moving speed of the machine, can
be calculated as follows:
d .
FC = F × N × OVR (Expression 1)
ve
er
where FC: Effective feed rate (mm/min or in/min)
s
re
F: Designated feed rate (mm/rev or in/rev)
ts
N: Spindle speed (min–1)
gh
OVR: Cutting feed override
ri
If multiple axes are selected at the same time, effective feed rate FC given by expression 1
ll
.A
above will become valid for the corresponding vectorial direction.
N
O
4. Remarks
TI
43
1. A
An effective feed rate that is expressed in a feed rate per minute (mm/min or in/min) is dis-
R
94
2. If the effective feed rate should become larger than the cutting feed limit speed, that limit
R
o.
C
al
3. In the dry run mode, feed will become asynchronous and the machine will operate at an
ri
ZA
4. According to the setting of bit 1 of parameter F93, synchronous or asynchronous feed mode
IM
(G99 or G98) is automatically made valid upon power-on or by execution of M02 or M30.
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
6-2
Serial No. 269443
FEED FUNCTIONS 6
.
d
1. Controlling linear axes
ve
er
The feed rate that has been selected using an F-code acts as a linear velocity in the moving
s
direction of the tool, irrespective of whether only one axis is to be controlled or multiple axes
re
simultaneously.
ts
gh
Example: If linear axes (X- and Z-axes) are to be controlled using a feed rate of f:
ri
ll
.A
X
N
O
TI
43
PO
26
R
o.
C
al
Z
ri
A
IM
TEP033
K
ZA
When only linear axes are to be controlled, setting of a cutting feed rate itself is only required.
A
The feed rate for each axis refers to that component of the specified feed rate which cor-
M
responds with the ratio of movement stroke on the respective axis to the actual movement
YA
distance.
3
01
x
X-axis feed rate = f ×
(c
x2 + z2
ht
z
Z-axis feed rate = f ×
ig
x + z2
2
yr
op
When a rotational axis is to be controlled, the selected feed rate acts as the rotating speed of the
rotational axis, that is, as an angular velocity.
Thus, the cutting speed in the moving direction of the tool, that is, a linear velocity varies
according to the distance from the rotational center to the tool. This distance must be considered
when setting a feed rate in the program.
6-3
Serial No. 269443
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
. d
ve
er
TEP034
s
re
In this case, the cutting speed in the moving direction of the tool (linear velocity) “fc” is
ts
calculated by:
gh
π•r
ri
fc = f ×
180
ll
.A
Hence, the feed rate to be programmed for the required value fc is:
N
180
f = fc ×
O
π•r
TI
43
Note: A
If the tool is to be moved by controlling linear axes along the circumference using the
R
94
circular interpolation function, the feed rate programmed is the velocity acting in the
PO
26
Example 2: If linear axes (X- and Z-axes) are to be controlled at a feed rate of f using the
N
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
X
K
ZA
P2
x
A
P1
01
Z
z
)2
k
(c
TEP036
ht
ig
In this case, the X- and Z-axis feed rates will change with the movement of the tool. The
yr
6-4
Serial No. 269443
FEED FUNCTIONS 6
3. Controlling a linear axis and a rotational axis at the same time
The NC unit controls linear axes and rotational axes in exactly the same manner.
For control of rotational axes, data given as a coordinate word (C or H) is handled as an angle,
and data given as a feed rate (F) is handled as a linear velocity. In other words, an angle of one
degree for a rotational axis is handled as equivalent to a moving distance of 1 mm for a linear
axis. Thus, for simultaneous control of a linear axis and a rotational axis, the magnitudes of the
individual axis components of the data that has been given by F are the same as those existing
during linear axis control described previously in Subparagraph 1. above. In this case, however,
the velocity components during linear axis control remain constant in both magnitude and
direction, whereas those of rotational axis control change in direction according to the movement
.
of the tool. Therefore, the resulting feed rate in the moving direction of the tool changes as the
d
ve
tool moves.
er
Example: If a linear axis (X-axis) and a rotational axis (C-axis) are to be controlled at the same
s
re
time at a feed rate of f:
ts
gh
ri
fc ft - “fx” is constant in both size
and direction.
ll
- “fc” is constant in size, but
.A
P2 varies in direction.
N
fx - “ft” varies in both size and
O
direction.
TI
fc
43
r A
R
94
θ ft
PO
26
P1
fx
R
o.
c
O
N
x
C
θ
al
K
ri
ZA
Center of rotation
Se
MEP041
A
IM
The X-axis feed rate (linear velocity), fx, and the C-axis feed rate (angular velocity), ω, can be
ZA
calculated as follows:
A
M
x c
fx = f × !!!!!!! [1] ω=f× !!!!!!! [2]
YA
2 2
x +c x + c2
2
3
The linear velocity “fc” that relates to C-axis control is expressed as:
01
π•r
)2
fc = ω • !!!!!!! [3]
(c
180
ht
If the velocity in the moving direction of the tool at starting point P1 is taken as “ft”, and its X- and
ig
Y-axis components as “ftx” and “fty” respectively, then one can express “ftx” and “fty” as follows:
yr
op
π π
ftx = –r sin ( θ) × ω + fx !!!!!!! [4]
C
180 180
π π
fty = –r cos (
180
θ) ×
180
ω !!!!!!! [5]
where r denotes the distance (in millimeters) from the rotational center to the tool, and q denotes
the angle (in degrees) of starting point P1 to the X-axis at the rotational center.
6-5
Serial No. 269443
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
From expressions [1] through [5] above, the resultant velocity “ft” is:
ft = ftx2 + fty2
x2 – x • c • r sin ( π θ) π + ( π • r • c )2
180 90 180
=f× !!!!!!! [6]
x2 + c2
x2 + c2
f = ft × !!!!!!! [7]
x – x • c • r sin ( π θ) π + ( π • r • c )2
2
180 90 180
. d
ve
In expression [6], “ft” is the velocity at starting point P1 and thus the value of ft changes with that
er
of θ which changes according to the rotational angle of the C-axis. To keep cutting speed “ft” as
s
re
constant as possible, the rotational angle of the C-axis in one block must be minimized to ensure
a minimum rate of change of θ.
ts
gh
ri
6-5 Threading Leads
ll
.A
The thread lead in the threading mode (G32, G34, G76 or G92) can be designated using a
N
seven-digit value preceded by address F or eight-digit value preceded by address E.
O
TI
The thread lead command range is 0.0001 to 999.9999 mm/rev (F with 7 digits) or 0.0001 to
43
A
999.99999 mm/rev (E8-digit) (with unit of data setting of microns).
R
94
PO
26
E (Number of threads
al
ZA
Se
1 (=0.0001) 1 (=1)
A
E (Number of threads
Command address F (in/rev) E (in/rev)
per inch)
3
01
1 (=0.000001) 1 (=1)
Smallest input capacity
(1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000)
)2
6-6
Serial No. 269443
FEED FUNCTIONS 6
f f
Continuous Continuous
. d
command command
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
TR TR t t
Td
ri
Tc Tc
ll
Rapid feed acceleration/deceleration pattern Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration pattern
.A
(TR = Rapid feed time constant) (Tc = Cutting feed time constant)
N
(Td = Deceleration check time)
O
TI
TEP037
43
A
R
94
During rapid traverse and manual feed, the following block is executed after the command pulse
PO
26
of the current block has become “0” and the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit
R
o.
has become “0”. During cutting feed, the following block is executed as soon as the command
O
N
pulse of the current block becomes “0” and also the following block can be executed when an
al
external signal (error detection) can detect that the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration
ri
ZA
Se
circuit has reached “0”. When the in-position check has been made valid (selected by machine
A
parameter) during the deceleration check, it is first confirmed that the tracking error of the
IM
acceleration/deceleration circuit has reached “0”, then it is checked that the position deviation is
K
less than the parameter setting, and finally the following block is executed.
ZA
A
M
This function exercises control over the actual rate of cutting feed in which override has been
3
applied to the programmed rate so that the speed limit preset independently for each axis is not
01
)2
exceeded.
(c
6-7
Serial No. 269443
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
2. Programming format
.
d
G09 G01 (G02, G03) ;
ve
er
Exact-stop check command G09 is valid only for the cutting command code (G01, G02, or G03)
s
re
that has been set in that block.
ts
3. Sample program
gh
ri
N001 G09 G01 X100.000 F150; The next block is executed after an in-position status
ll
check following machine deceleration and stop.
.A
N002 Z100.000 ;
N
O
TI
43
f A
R
94
X-axis
With G09
R
o.
N001 available
O
N
N001
al
K
ri
ZA
Z-axis
A
IM
N002
K
The solid line indicates a feedrate pattern with the G09 available.
ZA
TEP038
YA
6-8
Serial No. 269443
FEED FUNCTIONS 6
4. Detailed description
d .
ve
er
Ts Ts: Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration
s
re
time constant
ts
TEP039
gh
Fig. 6-2 Continuous cutting feed commands
ri
ll
B. Cutting feed commands with in-position status check
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
C
al
Lc
K
ri
ZA
Se
Ts Ts
IM
TEP040
A
Fig. 6-3 Block-to-block connection in cutting feed in-position status check mode
M
YA
As shown in Fig. 6-3, in-position width Lc represents the remaining distance within the block
immediately preceding the next block to be executed.
3
01
Lc
ig
Preceding block
TEP041
6-9
Serial No. 269443
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
.
Ts
d
Ts : Acceliration/deceleration time constant
ve
Td Td : Deceleration check time
er
Td = Ts + (0 to 14 ms)
s
re
ts
TEP042
gh
ri
- With exponential acceleration/deceleration
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
R
o.
O
N
Ts
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time
al
constant
ri
Td
ZA
Td = 2 × Ts + (0 to 14 ms)
A
IM
TEP043
K
ZA
2 × Ts
ig
yr
Td Ts
op
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time
C
constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td = 2 × Ts + (0 to 14 ms)
TEP044
The time required for the deceleration check during cutting feed is the longest among the cutting
feed deceleration check times of each axis determined by the cutting feed accele-
ration/deceleration time constants and by the cutting feed acceleration/ deceleration mode of the
axes commanded simultaneously.
6-10
Serial No. 269443
FEED FUNCTIONS 6
2. Programming format
. d
G61;
ve
s er
6-10 Automatic Corner Override: G62
re
ts
1. Function and purpose
gh
ri
Command G62 automatically overrides in the tool radius compensation mode the selected feed
ll
rate to reduce the tool load during inner-corner cutting or automatic inner-corner rounding.
.A
Once command G62 has been given, the automatic corner override function will remain valid
N
O
until it is cancelled by tool radius compensation cancellation (G40), exact-stop check mode
TI
(G61), tapping mode (G63), or cutting mode (G64).
43
A
R
94
2. Programming format
PO
26
G62 ;
o.
O
N
C
al
3. Detailed description
K
ri
ZA
Se
A. Inner-corner cutting
A
IM
When inner corner of a workpiece is cut as shown in the figure below, the load on the tool
K
increases because of large amount of cutting. Using G62 in such a case allows the cutting feed
ZA
rate to be automatically overriden within the preset zone, and thus the tool load to be reduced to
A
This function, however, is valid only for programming the as-finished shape of a workpiece.
3
01
Programmed path
)2
(Finishing contour)
θ Cutting amount
(c
ht
Workpiece
S Workpiece surface shape
ig
yr
[3]
[1] [2]
op
amount
Ci
Tool
θ : Inner-corner maximum angle
Ci : Deceleration zone (IN)
MEP046
6-11
Serial No. 269443
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
<Machine operation>
- When the automatic corner override function is not used:
In the figure above, as the tool is moving in order of positions [1]→[2]→[3], the load on the tool
increases because the cutting amount at position [3] is larger than that of position [2] by the
area of hatched section S.
- When the automatic corner override function is used:
In the figure above, if maximum angle q of the inner corners is smaller than that preset in the
appropriate parameter, the feed rate is automatically overriden with the preset value for
movement through deceleration zone Ci.
<Setting parameters>
. d
Set the following parameters as user parameters:
ve
- E22: Override......................................... 0 to 100 (%)
s er
- F21: Inner-corner maximum angle θ...... 0 to 180 (deg)
re
ts
- F22: Deceleration zone Ci data ............. 0 to 99999.999 (mm) or to 3937.000 (inches)
gh
For further details of parameter setting, refer to the description in the Parameter list.
ri
ll
.A
B. Automatic corner rounding
N
O
TI
Workpiece
43
surface shape A
R
94
PO
26
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Cutting amount
)2
(c
ht
TEP046
ig
yr
For inner corner cutting with automatic corner rounding, override will be effected as set in
op
parameter through the deceleration zone Ci and corner rounding section (No check made about
C
angle).
6-12
Serial No. 269443
FEED FUNCTIONS 6
4. Operation examples
- Line-to-line corner
Programmed path
θ
Tool center path
Ci
.
d
Tool
ve
er
s
re
MEP047
ts
The feed rate is automatically overridden with the preset value by the parameter E22 through
gh
deceleration zone Ci.
ri
ll
- Line-to-circular (outside offsetting) corner
.A
N
O
TI
Programmed
43
A path
R
94
Tool center
PO
path
26
θ
R
o.
O
N
Ci
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Tool
Se
A
IM
MEP048
K
ZA
The feed rate is automatically overridden with the preset value by the parameter E22 through
A
M
Programmed path θ
ht
ig
yr
Ci
op
Tool
Tool
MEP049
The feed rate is automatically overridden with the preset value by the parameter E22 through
deceleration zone Ci.
Note: Data of deceleration zone Ci at which automatic overriding occurs represents the
length of the arc for a circular interpolation command.
6-13
Serial No. 269443
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
N2
N1 θ
Programmed path
Ci
Tool center path
.
d
MEP050
ve
er
The feed rate is automatically overridden with the preset value by the parameter E22 through
s
re
deceleration zone Ci.
ts
gh
5. Correlationships to other command functions
ri
Function Override at corners
ll
.A
Cutting feedrate override Automatic corner override is applied after cutting feed override.
N
Override cancel Automatic corner override is not cancelled by override cancel.
O
TI
Limitation of feed rate Valid (for the feed rate after automatic corner override)
43
Dry run A
Automatic corner override is invalid.
R
94
PO
Skip (G31) During tool-diameter offset, G31 will result in a program error.
R
o.
C
al
G00 Invalid
K
ri
ZA
G01 Valid
Se
6. Precautions
K
ZA
1. Automatic corner override is valid only during the G01, G02 or G03 modes; it is invalid
A
during the G00 mode. Also, when the command mode is changed over from G00 to G01,
M
YA
G02, or G03 (or vice versa) at a corner, automatic corner override is not performed on the
G00-containing block at that corner.
3
01
2. Even in the automatic corner override mode, automatic corner override is not performed
)2
6-14
Serial No. 269443
FEED FUNCTIONS 6
3. Automatic corner override does not occur at corners where tool radius compensation is to
start or to be cancelled.
.
d
ve
er
TEP051
s
re
ts
4. Automatic corner override does not occur at corners where I, J and K vector commands for
gh
tool radius compensation are to be executed.
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
Programmed path
43
A
R
94
PO
vector commands
O
N
(G41X_Y_I_J_;)
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
TEP052
K
ZA
5. Automatic corner override occurs only when crossing points can be calculated. Crossing
A
- Four or more blocks that do not include move command appear in succession.
3
6. For circular interpolation, the deceleration zone is represented as the length of the arc.
01
7. The parameter-set angle of an inner corner is applied to the angle existing on the
)2
programmed path.
(c
ht
8. Setting the maximum angle to 0 or 180 degrees in the angle parameter results in an
ig
9. Setting the override to 0 or 100 in the override parameter results in an automatic corner
C
override failure.
6-15
Serial No. 269443
6 FEED FUNCTIONS
.
d
The G63 command mode will remain valid until it is cancelled by exact-stop check mode (G61),
ve
er
automatic corner override (G62) or cutting mode (G64).
s
re
2. Programming format
ts
gh
G63 ;
ri
ll
6-12 Cutting Mode: G64
.A
N
O
1. Function and purpose
TI
43
Command G64 enters the NC unit into a control mode proper to obtain smoothly cut surfaces.
A
R
94
Unlike the exact-stop check mode (G61 mode), the cutting mode allows the next block to be
PO
26
The G64 command mode is cleared by exact-stop check mode (G61), automatic corner override
O
N
ZA
Se
2. Programming format
IM
G64 ;
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
6-16 E
Serial No. 269443
DWELL FUNCTIONS 7
7 DWELL FUNCTIONS
The start of execution of the next block can be delayed using a G04 command.
2. Programming format
.
d
G98 G04 X/U_;
ve
er
or
s
G98 G04 P_;
re
ts
Data must be set in 0.001 seconds.
gh
For address P, the decimal point is not available. Setting a decimal point will cause an alarm.
ri
ll
3. Detailed description
.A
N
1. The setting range for dwell time is as follows:
O
TI
Unit of data setting Range for address X or U Range for address P
43
PO
26
2. The count for the dwell command which is preceded by a block with cutting-feed command
N
is not started until the movement of the preceding block has been brought to a complete
al
K
ri
stop.
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
Cutting command in
A
Next block
3
01
Dwell command
)2
(c
Dwell time
ht
ig
yr
TEP053
op
C
If the dwell command is given in one block together with an M-, S-, T- or B-code, the dwell
count and the execution of the respective code will be started at the same time.
3. If the bit 2 of parameter F92 is set to 1, dwell command value is always processed in time
specification irrespective of G98 and G99 modes.
7-1
Serial No. 269443
7 DWELL FUNCTIONS
4. Sample programs
- When data is to be set in 0.01 mm, 0.001 mm or 0.0001 inches:
G04 X 500 ;..........................................Dwell time = 0.5 s
G04 X 5000 ;........................................Dwell time = 5.0 s
G04 X 5. ;.............................................Dwell time = 5.0 s
G04 P 5000 ;........................................Dwell time = 5.0 s
G04 P 12.345 ; ....................................Alarm
- When data is to be set in 0.0001 inches and dwell time is included before G04:
X5. G04 ;..............................................Dwell time = 50 s (Equivalent to X50000G04.)
.
7-2 Dwell Command in Number of Revolutions: (G99) G04
d
ve
er
1. Function and purpose
s
re
Setting command G04 in the feed-per-revolution mode (command G99) suspends the start of
ts
execution of the next block until the spindle has rotated the specified number of revolutions.
gh
ri
2. Programming format
ll
.A
G99 G04 X/U_ ;
N
or
O
TI
G99 G04 P_ ;
43
A
R
94
For address P, the decimal point is not available. Setting a decimal point will cause an alarm.
R
o.
3. Detailed description
N
C
al
ZA
Se
2. The count for the dwell command which is preceded by a block with cutting-feed command
M
is not started until the movement of the preceding block has been brought to a complete
YA
stop.
3
01
)2
(c
ht
preceding block
yr
Next block
op
C
Dwell command
If the dwell command is given in one block together with an M-, S-, T- or B-code, the dwell
count and the execution of the respective code will be started at the same time.
7-2
Serial No. 269443
DWELL FUNCTIONS 7
3. The dwell function is also valid during the machine lock mode.
4. During rest of the spindle, dwell count is also halted. When the spindle restarts rotating,
dwell count will also restart.
5. If the bit 2 of parameter F92 is set to 1, dwell command value is alway processed in time
specification.
6. This function cannot be used unless the position detecting encoder is provided to the
spindle.
d.
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
7-3
7
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
DWELL FUNCTIONS
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K
7-4 E
94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS 8
8 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
d.
ve
Refer to the machine specification for more specific relationships between available data and
er
functions.
s
re
For M-codes M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, M998 and M999, the next block of data is not
ts
read into the input buffer since pre-reading is disabled automatically.
gh
The M-codes can be included in any block that contains other command codes. If, however, the
ri
M-codes are included in a block that contains move commands, then the execution priority will
ll
be either
.A
N
- the M-code functions are executed after completion of movement, or
O
- the M-code functions are executed together with movement.
TI
43
A
It depends on the machine specifications which type of processing is applied.
R
94
Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all M commands except
PO
26
C
al
ZA
When this M-code is read, the tape reader will stop reading subsequent blocks. Whether the
Se
machine function such as spindle rotation and coolant will also stop depends on the
IM
machine specifications. The machine operation is restarted by pressing the cycle start
K
button on the operation panel. Whether resetting can be initiated by M00 or not also
ZA
When the M01 code is read with the [OPTIONAL STOP] menu function set to ON, the tape
reader will stop operating to perform the same function as M00.
3
01
The M01 command will be ignored if the [OPTIONAL STOP] menu function is set to OFF.
)2
Example: M
(c
N11 M01;
ig
M
op
C
8-1
Serial No. 269443
8 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
Automatic resetting by this command cancels both modal commands and offsetting data,
but the designated-position display counter is not cleared to zero.
The NC unit will stop operating when tape rewinding is completed (the automatic run mode
lamp goes out). To restart the NC unit, the cycle start button must be pressed.
Beware that if, during the restart of the NC unit following completion of M02 or M30
execution, the first movement command has been set in a coordinate word only, the valid
mode will be the interpolation mode existing when the program ended. It is recommended,
therefore, that the first movement command be given with an appropriate G-code.
4. Subprogram Call/End: M98, M99
Use M98 or M99 to branch the control into a subprogram or to recall it back to the calling
program.
d.
As M99 and M99 are internaly processed by the NC M-code signals ans strobe signals are
ve
not output.
ser
<Internal processing by the NC unit when M00, M01, M02 or M30 is used>
re
After M00, M01, M02 or M30 has been read, data pre-reading is automatically aborted. Other
ts
gh
tape rewinding operations and the initialization of modals by resetting differ according to the
ri
machine specification.
ll
.A
Note 1: M00, M01, M02 and M30 output independent signals, which will be cancelled by
pressing the RESET key.
N
O
Note 2: Tape rewinding is performed only when the tape reader has a rewinding function.
TI
43
A
R
94
The No. 2 miscellaneous functions are used for positioning an index table. For the NC unit, these
o.
O
N
address A, B or C.
K
ri
ZA
The output signals are BCD signals of command data and start signals.
Se
A, B or C codes can be included in any block that contains other command codes. If, however,
IM
the A, B or C codes can be included in a block that contains move commands, then the execution
K
Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all No. 2 miscellaneous
01
functions.
)2
(c
Address combinations are shown below. The same address for both additional axis and the No.
ht
Additional axis
op
A B C
No. 2 miscellaneous functions
C
A × ! !
B ! × !
C ! ! ×
Note: When A has been designated as the No. 2 miscellaneous function address, linear
angle commands cannot be used.
8-2 E
Serial No. 269443
SPINDLE FUNCTIONS 9
9 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
.d
Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands.
ve
The analog signal specifications are given below.
s er
- Output voltage ......................................................... 0 to 10V or –8 to +8V
re
ts
- Resolution................................................................ 1/4096 (2 to the power of –12)
gh
- Load conditions ....................................................... 10 kiloohms
ri
ll
- Output impedance ................................................... 220 ohms
.A
If the parameters for up to 4 gear range steps are set in advance, the gear range corresponding
N
O
to the S command will be selected by the NC unit and the gear signal will be output. The analog
TI
voltage is calculated in accordance with the input gear signal.
43
A
R
94
- Parameters corresponding to individual gears ...... Limit speed, maximum speed, gear shift
PO
26
C
al
ZA
Se
A
IM
This function controls automatically the spindle speed as the coordinates are changed during
ZA
cutting in diametral direction so as to execute cutting by keeping constant the relative speed
A
2. Programming format
3
01
s: Surface speed
(c
3. Detailed description
1. Axis for constant surface speed control is to be set by address P.
P1: First axis
P2: Second axis
X-axis (the first axis) is automatically selected if argument P is omitted.
9-1
Serial No. 269443
9 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
Turret
. d
ve
R2 R1
s er
re
D740PB0072
ts
gh
The default value is “R1” (automatically set if argument R is omitted).
ri
ll
2. Control change program and actual movement
.A
G96 G01 X50. Z100. S200; Spindle speed is controlled for a surface speed of
N
O
M 200 m/min.
TI
43
G97 G01 X50. Z100. F300 S500; Spindle speed is controlled for 500 min–1.
A
R
94
M
PO
26
O
N
4. Remarks
al
K
ri
ZA
1. The initial modal state (G96 or G97) can be selecyed by parameter F93 bit 0.
Se
3. The last value of S in the control mode of G96 is stored during cancellation of the control
3
(G97) and automatically made valid upon resumption of the control mode (G96).
01
)2
4. The constant surface speed control is effective even during machine lock.
op
(revs/min) retains the spindle speed which has resulted at the end of the last spindle control
in the G96 mode.
Example: G97 S800; 800 min–1
G96 S100; 100 m/min or 100 ft/min
G97; x min–1
The speed x denotes the spindle speed of G96 mode at the end of the pre-
ceding block.
6. The constant surface speed control does not apply to the milling spindle.
9-2
Serial No. 269443
SPINDLE FUNCTIONS 9
9-3 Spindle Speed Range Setting: G50
2. Programming format
G50 Ss Qq Rr;
s: Maximum spindle speed
q: Minimum spindle speed
.
r: Spindle for speed limitation
d
ve
er
3. Detailed description
s
re
1. For gear change between the spindle and spindle motor, four steps of gear range can be set
ts
by the related parameters in steps of 1 min–1. In range defined by two ways, parameter
gh
setting and G50 SsQq setting, the smaller data will be used for the upper limit and the larger
ri
data for the lower limit.
ll
.A
2. Spindle for speed clamping is to be set by address R.
N
O
R1: Turning spindle (see the figure below)
TI
R2: Turning spindle (see the figure below)
43
PO
26
R
o.
Turret
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
A
IM
K
ZA
A
R2 R1
M
YA
D740PB0072
3
01
)2
Note: The default value is “R1” (automatically set if argument R is omitted). Give another
(c
turning spindle 2 from being raised up to the highest value in accordance with the
ig
9-3
9
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
ht
SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K
9-4 E
94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
TOOL FUNCTIONS 10
10 TOOL FUNCTIONS
.
d
Tool offset number
ve
er
Tool number
s
re
Use two digits after the decimal point as follows to designate the tool ID code with reference to
ts
the settings on the TOOL DATA display:
gh
<Normal tools>
ri
ll
ID code w/o A B C D E F G H J K L M
.A
◇◇
N
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13
O
ID code N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
TI
43
◇◇ 14 15 16 17 18 19 A 21 22 23 24 25 26
R
94
PO
<Heavy tools>
26
R
o.
ID code A B C D E F G H J K L M
O
N
◇◇ 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 71 72 73
al
K
ri
ZA
ID code N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Se
◇◇
A
74 75 76 77 78 79 81 82 83 84 85 86
IM
Only one T-code can be included in a block, and the available range of T-codes depends on the
K
ZA
machine specifications. For further details, especially on how to number the actual tools to be
A
The T-code can be given with any other commands in one block, and the T-code given together
YA
with an axis motion command is executed, depending upon the machine specifications, in one of
3
01
10-1
Serial No. 269443
10 TOOL FUNCTIONS
d .
digit T-code).
ve
T !!!""".◇◇ ;
ser
Tool ID code
re
Tool offset number
ts
gh
Tool number
ri
ll
10-3 Tool Function (8-Digit T-Code)
.A
N
This function allows you to select a tool number (from 0 to 99999999) using eight-digit command
O
data preceded by address T. Only one T-code can be included in a block.
TI
43
A
Set bit 4 of parameter F94 to 0 to select the group-number designation for T-code funciton, or set
R
94
PO
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
10-2 E
Serial No. 269443
1. Outline
Tool offset must be set with the lower two or three digits of a four-digit or six-digit number
following address T (where the higher two or three digits are used to designate the tool number).
Whether the offset number is set by lower two or three digits is selected by parameter F162 bit 4.
One set of T command can be included in the same block.
The tool offset amount differs according to the combination of G53.5/G52.5 (MAZATROL
.
coordinate system selection/cancel) and parameter F111 bit 5 (MAZATROL tool wear compen-
d
ve
sation data valid/invalid) as in the following table.
s er
re
Program G53.5 (MAZATROL coordinate system) G52.5 (Cancellation of MAZATROL coord. sys.)
ts
T001000 T001001 T001000 T001001
gh
Parameter [1] [2] [1] [2]’ [1] [2] [1] [2]’
ri
[1] - Tool of TNo. 1 [1] - Tool of TNo. 1 [1] - Tool of TNo. 1 [1] - Tool of TNo. 1
ll
indexed indexed indexed indexed
.A
- TOOL SET data (on - TOOL SET and
N
F111 bit 5 = 1 the TOOL DATA WEAR COMP. data
O
display) of TNo. 1 (on the TOOL
TI
(Validation of
43
[2] - Tool offset cancel [2]’ - Data of No. 1 on the [2] - Tool offset cancel [2]’ - Data of No. 1 on
TOOL OFFSET dis- the TOOL OFFSET
R
o.
indexed
ri
ZA
Se
(Invalidation of
See above. display) of TNo. 1 See above. See above.
MAZATROL tool
K
validated
wear comp. data)
ZA
play validated
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
11-1
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
Programmed path
ers
re
TEP054
ts
gh
Note 1: The movement when offsetting with the T command is rapid feed in a G00 modal and
ri
cutting feed with other modals.
ll
.A
Note 2: When performing offset in T command execution, the path is made by linear
N
interpolation in an arc modal.
O
TI
Note 3: When performing offset in T command execution, offset will not function until the arrival
43
A
of any command G except those listed below when the T command is included in the
R
94
PO
R
o.
G04: Dwell
O
N
ZA
Se
N1 T001001;
K
N2
ZA
N2 X100.Z200.;
Tool path after offset
A
Offset amount
3
01
N1 Programmed path
)2
(c
TEP055
ht
ig
Note: When performing offset with a move command, offset is applied if the offset amount is
yr
lower than the parameter value of “tolerance for radial value difference at starting and
op
ending points in arc command” when offset is performed for the first time with an arc
C
command. If the amount is higher, a program error will occur. (This also applies when
the arc command and T command are in the same block for offsetting with T
command.)
11-2
Serial No. 269443
.
d
Reference position
ve
(reference point)
er
s
X-axis tool position
re
offset amount
ts
gh
X
ri
ll
.A
Z-axis tool position
offset amount Z
N
O
TEP056
TI
43
A
R
B. Setting to the tool nose position of reference tool
94
PO
26
R
o.
Reference tool
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Reference tool
A
offset amount X
ZA
A
M
offset amount
3
TEP057
01
)2
When tool number is changed, the tool position offset for the new tool number is added to the
ig
N1 T001001;
Tool offset path
C
TEP058
11-3
Serial No. 269443
N3 G1 X10.0 Z20.0; N1
N3
In this case, offset is performed by the block
with the move command.
Offset
amount
d .
Programmed path
ve
er
TEP059
s
re
ts
B. When 0 is set as the offset amount
gh
Offset is cancelled when 0 is set as the offset amount of the tool position offset number.
ri
ll
N1 G1 X10.0 Z10.0 F10;
.A
Tool offset path
N2 T001001; N2
N
N3 G1 X10.0 Z20.0;
O
N1 N3
TI
In this case, offset is performed by the block
43
A
R
94
Offset
amount
R
o.
Programmed path
O
N
C
al
TEP060
ri
ZA
Se
4. Remarks
IM
- When G28, G29 or G30 is commanded, the movement is performed to the position where
K
ZA
offset is cancelled. But as offset amount remains stored in the memory, the positioning for the
succeeding move command is executed with the offset operation.
A
M
11-4
Serial No. 269443
11-3-1 Outline
.
d
The command codes enable the offset direction to be fixed or automatically identified.
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
Tool nose center path on programmed
ll
machining shape
.A
Tool nose center
N
O
TI
43
PO
26
Machining shape
R
commanded in program
O
N
TEP061
C
al
K
ri
ZA
2. Programming format
Se
A
IM
G41 Nose radius/Tool radius compensation (to the left) ON G41 (Xx/Uu Zz/Ww) ;
A
G42 Nose radius/Tool radius compensation (to the right) ON G42 (Xx/Uu Zz/Ww) ;
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
11-5
Serial No. 269443
3. Detailed description
1. G40 serves to cancel the tool nose radius compensation mode.
2. Tool nose radius compensation function prereads the data in the following two move
command blocks (up to 5 blocks when there are no move function commands) and controls
the tool nose radius center path by the intersection point calculation method so that it is
offset from the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the nose radius.
N3
d.
ve
er
Prior to the N1 block execution,
N2
s
the next move command block
re
is preread and the coordinates
at the intersection point are
ts
N1 calculated.
gh
ri
ll
.A
TEP063
N
O
TI
In the above figure, “r” is the tool nose radius compensation amount (nose radius).
43
3.
A
The tool nose radius compensation amount corresponds to the tool length number and it
R
94
PO
4. If four or more blocks without move commands exist in five continuous blocks, overcutting or
o.
O
N
undercutting will result. However, blocks in which optional block skip is valid are ignored.
al
5. Tool nose radius compensation function is also valid for fixed cycles (G77 to G79) and for
ri
ZA
Se
However, in the roughing cycles, the tool nose radius compensation function applied for
finish shape is cancelled and upon completion of the roughing, NC unit will re-enter the
K
ZA
compensation mode.
A
7. The compensation plane, move axes and next advance direction vector follow the plane
selection command designated by G17, G18 or G19.
3
01
G17............... XY-plane X, Y, I, J
)2
G18............... ZX-plane Z, X, K, I
(c
G19............... YZ-plane Y, Z, J, K
ht
ig
yr
op
C
11-6
Serial No. 269443
2 6 1
4 3 8
0, 9
d .
7 5 P 5 7
ve
+X P
er
Tool nose point 1 2 6
3 4
s
0 or 9
re
8
ts
Correspondence between hypothetical
gh
tool nose numbers and tool nose points
+Z
ri
TEP064
ll
.A
2. Tool nose point and compensation operation
N
O
TI
A. When the nose radius center has been aligned with the machining start position
43
A
R
94
PO
26
Machining
o.
G4 start position
N
K
ri
G42
ZA
Se
r
A
IM
K
ZA
radius compensation
M
B. When the tool nose point has been aligned with the machining start position
(c
ht
+X start position
yr
op
G40
Machining shape without nose
C
radius compensation
G42 or G46
Tool nose point path with nose
radius compensation
+Z
11-7
Serial No. 269443
. d
path agrees with the programmed path.
ve
er
Programs containing the tool nose radius compensation function must be terminated during the
s
compensation cancellation mode.
re
ts
2. Startup of nose radius/tool radius compensation
gh
ri
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation will begin when all the following conditions are met:
ll
.A
- Command G41 or G42 has been executed.
N
- The command used with the offsetting command is a move command other than those used for
O
arc interpolation.
TI
43
A
Offsetting will be performed only when reading of two through five blocks in succession is
R
94
completed, irrespective of whether the continuous operation or the single-block operation mode
PO
26
is used. (Two blocks are preread if move command is present and five blocks are preread if such
R
o.
During offsetting, maximal five blocks are preread and then calculation for offsetting is per-
al
K
ri
formed.
ZA
Se
Some G-codes may not allow prereading. If startup compensation vector cannot be provided
A
IM
If error is caused because of the reason above, provide serveral blocks including move
commands after G41, G42 or T command.
3
01
)2
(c
Machining program
ig
yr
to five blocks
G01_; G02_;
C
Blocks executed
T_; S_; G00_; G41_; G01_; G02_;
TEP068
11-8
Serial No. 269443
θ Programmed path θ
r Programmed path
r = Tool nose radius
.
center path
d
ve
G42 G42
s er
re
Starting point Starting point Tool nose radius
ts
Arc center
center path
gh
TEP069
ri
ll
For the corner exterior (obtuse angle) (90° ≤ θ < 180°)
.A
B.
N
Linear → Linear Linear → arc
O
TI
43
s
PO
Tool nose
26
r
o.
r path
O
N
θ Programmed path θ
al
G41 G41
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
path
TEP070
A
M
C.
3
s Arc center
(c
s
θ Programmed path
yr
r
r
Programmed path
op
C
G41
r θ
Tool nose radius
center path
Starting point G41
Note: When there is no axis move command in the same block, compensation is performed
perpendicularly to the movement direction of the next block direction.
11-9
Serial No. 269443
d.
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
11-10
Serial No. 269443
Linear → linear (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Linear → linear (0° < θ < 90°)
d .
ve
Linear → arc (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Tool nose radius center path
er
r
θ
s
re
s
Programmed path
θ
ts
Programmed path r
r
gh
r
ri
ll
s Tool nose radius center path
.A
N
Arc center
O
TI
Arc center
43
A
R
94
PO
26
Programmed path
ri
ZA
Se
θ
IM
r θ
K
r
ZA
Arc center
Tool nose radius r
A
center path
YA
s s
Point of
3
intersection
01
Arc → arc (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Arc → arc (0° < θ < 90°)
)2
Arc center
(c
Programmed path
ht
ig
Programmed path
yr
θ θ
op
C
11-11
Serial No. 269443
θ
θ
Programmed path Programmed path
r
r
s s
Tool nose radius center path r Tool nose radius
Point of
intersection center path
d .
ve
er
Linear → arc (obtuse angle) Linear → arc (obtuse angle)
s
re
ts
θ
θ
gh
ri
Programmed path Arc center
Programmed path
ll
r
.A
s s
Tool nose radius
N
Point of Tool nose radius center path
center path
O
intersection Point of r
TI
r
intersection
43
A
R
94
Arc center
PO
26
C
al
θ
ri
ZA
Arc center
θ
Se
Programmed path
A
Programmed path
IM
s
K
Arc center
3
intersection
(c
θ Arc center
ig
r
yr
θ
op
C
Programmed
path Arc center
Arc center Arc center
s
11-12
Serial No. 269443
Programmed path
Ending point of arc
.
d
ve
s
er
r
s
re
R
ts
Arc center
gh
TEP074
ri
ll
.A
D. In cases that no inner intersection point exist inside the corner
N
O
In cases such as those shown in the figure below, there may or may not be an intersection point
TI
of arcs A and B, depending on the particular offset data. In latter cases, a program error occurs
43
A
and the tool stops at the ending point of the previous block.
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
center path
K
ri
ZA
Center of arc A
Se
r
A
IM
r
K
Programmed path
ZA
intersection point.
YA
TEP075
)2
(c
If either of the following conditions is met in the nose radius/tool radius compensation mode, the
ig
yr
11-13
Serial No. 269443
θ Programmed path θ
r Programmed path
r = Tool nose radius
d .
ve
G40 G40 Tool nose
er
radius center
path
s
re
Ending point Ending point
Arc center
ts
gh
TEP076
ri
ll
B. For the corner exterior (obtuse angle)
.A
N
O
Linear → linear Arc → linear
TI
43
A
R
Tool nose radius center path
94
s s
PO
Point of intersection
26
r Programmed path r
O
N
θ θ
al
G40
K
G40
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
path
TEP077
A
M
YA
Arc center
s center path
(c
r
ht
ig
Programmed path s
yr
r θ Programmed path
op
r
C
G40
r θ
Tool nose radius
center path
Ending point G40
11-14
Serial No. 269443
The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command without
d .
commanding compensation cancel in the compensation mode. However, no change is possible
ve
in the compensation start block and the following block.
s er
re
Linear → Linear
ts
gh
Tool nose radius center path
ri
ll
r
.A
Programmed path r Point of intersection
N
O
This figure shows an
TI
G41 G41 G42 example in which no points
43
r change.
r
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
r
Linear ← → Arc
A
IM
r
r
K
ZA
r
YA
Programmed path
3
01
r r
)2
r
C
11-15
Serial No. 269443
Linear return
G41
Tool nose radius center path
G42
r
Programmed path
.d
ve
TEP080
s er
re
In the following cases, it is possible that the arc may exceed 360°.
ts
- Compensation direction is changed by the selection of G41 or G42.
gh
- I, J, K are commanded with G40.
ri
ll
In such cases, compensation is provided as shown above and a section will be left uncut.
.A
N
O
Arc of 360° or more due to compensation
TI
G42
43
A
R
94
PO
26
Programmed
o.
path
N
center path
ri
ZA
Se
G41
IM
G42
K
ZA
G01 (G42)
(c
G41
(G42)
yr
given G41
G01
op
G01
C
G01
G01
(G41)
(G42)
Right
TEP084’
11-16
Serial No. 269443
.
s
d
s
ve
er
Z
s
re
s
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
Intermediate point
O
TI
N5 N6 N7 N8
43
A
R
94
PO
26
(G41) M
R
o.
ZA
M
IM
TEP083
K
Note: The offset vectors do not change with the coordinate system setting command G52.
ZA
A
Tool nose radius compensation does not apply to the G32 block.
3
01
)2
G32
(c
ht
center path
yr
Point of intersection
op
r
C
Programmed path
TEP084
11-17
Serial No. 269443
.
Move-free
d
ve
G10P01R50;..................... Offset stroke setting
er
G50X600.Z500.;............ Coordinate system setting
s
re
Y40.; ............................... Movement not on offset plane
ts
G00;.................................. G-code only
gh
U0;.................................... Moving stroke 0 Movement stroke is zero
ri
ll
A. When a block that does not include movement is set during the start of compensation
.A
N
Vertical compensation will be performed on the next move block.
O
TI
43
N1 U60.W30.T0101; A
R
94
N3 U-50.W20.;
R
N4 U-20.W50.; N3
o.
O
N
C
al
N1
ri
ZA
N4
Se
X
A
IM
K
ZA
Z
A
TEP085
M
YA
Compensation vectors, however, will not be generated if four or more blocks that do not include
3
N1 U60.W30.T0101;
(c
N2 G41;
ht
N2 to N6
N3 G4 X1000;
ig
Move-free block
yr
N4 F100;
N7
op
N5 S500;
C
TEP086
11-18
Serial No. 269443
N1 T0101; N3 to N6
N2 G41 U60.W30.;
N3 G4 X1000; N7
N4 F100; Move-free block
N5 S500; N2 (Point of intersection)
N6 M3; N8
X
N7 U-50.W20.;
N8 U-20.W50.;
. d
ve
TEP086
s er
re
B. When a block that does not include movement is set during the compensation mode
ts
gh
Usual intersection point vectors will be generated unless four or more blocks that do not include
ri
movement appear in succession.
ll
.A
N
O
N6 U200.W100.;
TI
Move-free block
43
N7 G04 X1000; N7 N8
N8 W200.;
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
N6 N8
O
N
C
al
Block N7 is executed
ri
ZA
N6 here
Se
A
IM
K
TEP087
ZA
A
Vertical compensation vectors will be generated at the end point of preceding block if four or
M
N6 U200.W100.;
N11
N7 G4 X1000;
(c
N8 F100;
ht
Move-free block
N9 S500;
ig
yr
N11 W100.;
C
N7 to N10
In this case, excessive cutting may occur. N6
TEP089
11-19
Serial No. 269443
C. When a block that does not include movement is set together with compensation
cancellation
Only offset vectors will be cancelled if the block that does not include movement contains G40.
X
N6 U200.W100.;
N7 G40 G04 P1000;
N8 U50.W100.; N8
Z
N7
.d
ve
s er
N6
re
ts
gh
TEP089
ri
ll
.A
5. If I, J and K are set with G40
N
When the last move command of the four blocks which immediately precede the G40 command
O
TI
block is G41 or G42, movement will be handled as if it had been programmed to occur in the
43
A
vectorial direction of I, J, and K from the ending point of that last move command. That is, the
R
94
PO
area up to the intersection point with the virtual tool center path will be interpolated and then
26
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
(a, b)
A
IM
N2
(i, k)
Tool nose radius
K
center path A
ZA
r
r
A
G41
M
N1
YA
Programmed path
N1 (G41) G1 Z_;
3
N2 G40 Xa Zb li Kk;
01
)2
(c
TEP090
ht
In this case, pay attention that, irrespective of the compensation direction, the coordinates of the
ig
yr
intersection point will be calculated even if wrong vectors are set as shown in the diagram below.
op
C
11-20
Serial No. 269443
(a, b)
N2
Tool nose radius
center path
A
G41 r
N1
Programmed path Where I and K in the sample
r program shown above have
wrong signs
(i, k)
Virtual tool nose radius center path
. d
ve
TEP091
s er
Also, pay attention that a vertical vector will be generated on the block before that of G40 if the
re
compensation vector cannot be obtained by intersection point calculation.
ts
gh
ri
(a, b)
ll
.A
G40
N
X Tool nose radius
O
center path
A
TI
G41
43
A r
Programmed path
R
94
PO
Z
26
(i, k) r
R
o.
O
N
center path
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
TEP092
A
IM
Note: Part of the workpiece will be left uncut if the I/J/K command data in G40 preceded by
K
N3 G40 G1 U-150.W150.I100.K-100.;
3
01
)2
N2
(c
(i, j)
ht
ig
r
N1
yr
Programmed path
r
op
11-21
Serial No. 269443
6. Corner movement
If multiple offset vectors are generated at connections between move command blocks, the tool
will move linearly between those vectors. This action is referred to as corner movement.
If the multiple vectors do not agree, the tool will move around the corresponding corners (but this
movement belongs to the connection block). During single-block operation, the section of
(Preceding block + Corner movement) is executed as one block and the remaining section of
(Remaining corner movement + Next block) is executed during next movement as another block.
N1
.
Programmed path
d
ve
er
N2
s
re
θ
r
ts
gh
Tool nose radius center path r Arc center
ri
ll
This movement and its feedrate
.A
belong to block N2.
Stopping point in the single block mode
N
O
TEP094
TI
43
A
R
94
The compensation direction can be intentionally changed by setting the command G41/G42 and
R
o.
C
al
1. Programming format
ri
ZA
Se
The new I, K type vector (G18 plane) created by this command is described here. (Similar
M
YA
descriptions apply to I, J vector for the G17 plane and to J, K vector for the G19 plane.)
Being different from the vector on the intersection point of the programmed path, the I, K type
3
01
compensation vector is the vectors equivalent to the offset value, perpendicular to the direction
)2
designated by I, K. The I, K vector can be commanded even in the tool nose radius
(c
compensation mode (G41/G42 mode in the preceding block) and even at the compensation start
ht
11-22
Serial No. 269443
X (G40)
N110
N120 M
N130
N140 N150 N100 G41 U100.W100.K150.T0101;
Z N110 G04 X1000;
N120 G01 F1000;
D1
N100 N130 S500;
N140 M03;
N150 Z150.;
M
.d
Programmed path
ve
Tool nose radius center path
ser
TEP095
re
ts
When there are no move commands at the compensation start
gh
ri
X
ll
.A
N3
N
Z
O
(G40)
TI
M
43
N2
A N1 G41 K150.T0101;
R
94
PO
N2 U100.W100.;
26
N3 W150.;
R
o.
D1 N1 M
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
TEP096
IM
K
B. When I, K has been commanded in the tool nose radius compensation mode (G18 plane)
ZA
A
M
YA
M
(I, K) (G18 G41)
3
[2]
N110 G02 W100.K50.;
)2
N100 D1
N120 G00 W150.;
(c
[1] (N120) M
X
ht
ig
yr
11-23
Serial No. 269443
N3 N4
Z
N2 N5
(I, K)
.
N4 W150.;
d
ve
N5 G40;
er
TEP098
s
re
ts
3. Direction of offset vectors
gh
ri
A. In G41 mode
ll
.A
Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I, K vector through 90° to the left as
N
seen from the forward direction of the Y-axis (third axis) to the zero point.
O
TI
43
PO
26
I, K direction
Offset vector direction (0, –100)
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
TEP099
M
YA
B. In G42 mode
3
01
Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I, K vector through 90° to the right as
)2
seen from the forward direction of the Y-axis (third axis) to the zero point
(c
ht
ig
(0, 100)
C
11-24
Serial No. 269443
N1 G28 X0Z0;
X N2 G41 T0101 F1000;
N3 G01 U100.W100.;
N4 G42 W100.I-100.K100.T0102;
Z N5 U-100.W100.;
(I, K) N6 G40;
N7 M02;
N4 %
N3 D2
. d
ve
N2
D1 N5
er
N6
s
re
TEP101
ts
gh
ri
5. Offset stroke of offset vectors
ll
.A
The offset stroke is determined by the offset number (modal) in the block including the I, K
N
designation.
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
T1 (A)
o.
T1
O
(G41 T0101)
N
(I, K)
M
al
N100
K
ZA
N110
Se
N110 U-100.W100.;
A
M
IM
Z
K
ZA
A
M
TEP102
YA
Vector (A) is the offset stroke entered in tool offset number modal 1 in the N100 block.
3
01
)2
(c
ht
(B) T2
T1
ig
yr
(I, K)
op
X N200
(G41 T0101)
C
N210
M
N200 G41 W150.K50.T0102;
Z
N210 U-100.W100.;
M
TEP103
Vector (B) is the offset stroke entered in tool offset number modal 2 in the N200 block.
11-25
Serial No. 269443
6. Notes
- Set the I, K type vector in a linear interpolation mode (G0, G1). If it is set in an arc interpolation
mode at the start of compensation, program error will result.
An I, K designation in an arc interpolation during the compensation mode functions as an arc
center designation.
- When the I, K type vector has been designated, it is not deleted (avoidance of interference)
even if there is interference. Consequently, overcutting may occur in such a case.
N1 G28 X0 Z0;
.
N2 G41 T0101 F1000;
d
Z
ve
N3 W100.;
er
N3 N4 N4 G41 U-100.W100.K10.;
s
N5 N6 N5 U100.W100.;
re
N2
N6 G40;
ts
N7 M02;
gh
ri
ll
.A
Overcutting
N
(I, K)
O
TEP104
TI
43
A
R
7. Supplementary notes
94
PO
26
Refer to the following table for the compensation methods based on the presence and/or
R
o.
absence of the G41 and G42 commands and I, K (J) command data.
O
N
C
al
ZA
Se
11-26
Serial No. 269443
1. Interruption by MDI
Nose radius/tool radius compensation is valid during automatic operation, whether it is based on
the tape, memory, or MDI operation mode.
The following diagrams show what will occur if tape or memory operation is interrupted using the
MDI function following termination of the program at a block:
.
d
ve
er
N1 G41 T0101;
s
MDI interruption
re
N2 U50.W20.;
ts
N3 G3 U-40.W40.R70.; S1000 M3;
s (Stop position in the single
gh
block operation mode)
ri
ll
X
.A
N
O
TI
43
AN2
R
94
Z
PO
N3
26
TEP105
R
o.
O
N
K
ri
ZA
The offset vectors are recalculated automatically at the move command block after interruption.
Se
A
IM
N1 G41 T0101; s
MDI interruption
A
N2 U50.W20.;
M
s
U50.W30.;
3
01
)2
(c
N2
ht
N3
ig
yr
N1 G40 T0101; s
C
N2 N3
TEP106
11-27
Serial No. 269443
2. Manual interruption
Interruption
Tool path after compensation
.
d
ve
Programmed path
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
TEP107
ll
.A
B. Interruption with manual aboslute ON
N
O
In the incremental value command mode, the same operation results as with manual absolute
TI
OFF.
43
A
R
In the absolute value command mode, however, the tool returns to its original path at the ending
94
PO
26
point of the block following the interrupted block, as shown in the figure.
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
Interruption Interruption
C
TEP108
11-28
Serial No. 269443
d.
been selected during the compensation cancellation mode. If such updating is done during the
ve
compensation mode, vectors at the ending point of a block will be calculated using the offset data
er
selected for that block.
s
re
ts
3. Errors during tool nose radius compensation
gh
1. An error results when any of the following commands are programmed during tool nose
ri
ll
radius compensation.
.A
G17, G18, G19 (when a plane different from that selected during the compensation
N
has been commanded)
O
TI
G31
43
PO
G81 to G89
26
2. An error results when an arc command is set in the first or last block of the tool nose radius
R
o.
compensation.
N
C
al
3. A programming error results during tool nose radius compensation when the intersection
ri
ZA
point is not determined with single block skip in the interference block processing.
Se
A
IM
4. A programming error results when an error occurs in one of the preread blocks during tool
nose radius compensation.
K
ZA
5. A programming error results when interference can arise without no interference avoidance
A
11-29
Serial No. 269443
1. Overview
Even a tool whose nose radius has been compensated by usual tool nose radius compensation
based on two-block prereading may move into the workpiece to cut it. This status is referred to
as interference, and a function for the prevention of such interference is referred to as inter-
ference check.
The following two types of interference check are provided and their selection is to be made
using the parameter.
.
d
ve
Interference Interference check/prevention OFF The system will stop, with a program error
er
check/alarm (F92 bit 5 = 0) resulting before executing the cutting block.
s
Interference Interference check/prevention ON The path is changed to prevent cutting from
re
check/prevention (F92 bit 5 = 1) taking place.
ts
gh
Example:
ri
ll
Interference
.A
(G41) prevention path
Full circle for the radius
N
N1 G1 X-100. Z50.; of the tool nose
O
N2 X-100. Z70.;
TI
43
N3 X0. Z120.; A N1 N3
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
X
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
N2
Z
A
Cutting by N2 Cutting by N2
IM
K
TEP109
ZA
An alarm occurs before N1 is executed. Machining can be continued by updating the program
YA
11-30
Serial No. 269443
Programmed path
N3
N2
.
d
N1
ve
er
s
Tool nose radius center path
re
Linear movement when interference prevented
ts
gh
Tool nose radius center path
without interference check
ri
r
ll
.A
Programmed path
N
N3
O
N2
TI
Arc center
43
N1 r A
R
94
PO
TEP110
26
In the case of the figure below, the groove will be left uncut.
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Intererence
prevention path
K
center path
A
M
YA
Programmed path
3
01
)2
(c
TEP111
ht
ig
yr
op
C
11-31
Serial No. 269443
3. Interference check/alarm
Cases that an interference check/alarm occurs are listed below.
N1
.
d
ve
er
s
re
1
N2
ts
gh
2, 3
N3
ri
4
ll
.A
TEP112
N
O
TI
B. When interference check/prevention is selected
43
A
R
94
1. If all vectors at the ending point of the current block are erased but an effective vector(s)
PO
26
- For the diagram shown below, interference checking at N2 will erase all vectors existing at
N
the ending point of N2, but leave the vectors at the ending point of N3 effective.
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Alarm stop
K
ZA
N1 2 3
A
M
1 4
YA
3
N4
01
)2
N3
(c
N2
ht
TEP113
ig
yr
At this time, a program error will occur at the ending point of N1.
op
C
11-32
Serial No. 269443
1, 2, 3, 4
N1 N4
d .
ve
N2 N3
s er
re
TEP114
ts
gh
2. When prevention vectors cannot be generated:
ri
- Prevention vectors may not be generated even when the conditions for generating them
ll
are satisfied. Or even after generation, the prevention vectors may interfere with N3.
.A
A program error will therefore occur at the ending point of N1 if those vectors intersect at
N
O
angles of 90 degrees or more.
TI
43
A
← Alarm stop ← Alarm stop
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
N1 N1
al
K
ri
N2
ZA
N2
Se
N4
A
θ
IM
N4 N3
K
ZA
θ: Intersection angle
A
M
N3
YA
TEP115
3
- Prevention vectors may not be generated when preread prohibit blocks are interfered with
01
(G41)
ig
M
yr
Zz1;
C
N20 Xx1;
N30 M02 N20
M
TEP116
11-33
Serial No. 269443
3. When the after compensating moving direction of the tool is opposite to that of the program:
- For a program for the machining of parallel or downwardly extending grooves narrower
than the tool diameter, interference may be regarded as occurring even if it is not actually
occurring.
d.
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
TEP117
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
11-34
Serial No. 269443
2. Programming formats
.
d
G10 L2 P_ Xp_ Yp_ Zp_α_ (α: Additional axis)
ve
er
P0: Coordinate shift (Added feature)
s
re
P1: G54 P4: G57
ts
P2: G55 P5: G58
gh
P3: G56 P6: G59
ri
Data of P-commands other than those listed above are handled as P = 1.
ll
.A
If P-command setting is omitted, the workpiece offsets will be handled as currently effective
N
ones.
O
TI
- Programming format for the additional workpiece origin data (option)
43
PO
P1: G54.1 P1
26
P2: G54.1 P2
o.
O
N
M
C
al
ZA
Metric Inch
ZA
11-35
Serial No. 269443
.d
G10 L13 P_R_ Wear compensation concerning the radius
ve
- Programming format for the tool offset data of Type C
er
s
G10 L10 P_R_ Length offset; Geometric Z
re
G10 L11 P_R_ Length offset; Wear comp. Z
ts
gh
G10 L12 P_R_ Tool radius/Nose R offset (Geometric)
ri
G10 L13 P_R_ Tool radius/Nose R offset (Wear comp.)
ll
G10 L14 P_R_ Length offset; Geometric X
.A
G10 L15 P_R_ Length offset; Wear comp. X
N
G10 L16 P_R_ Length offset; Geometric Y
O
TI
G10 L17 P_R_ Length offset; Wear comp. Y
43
PO
26
The setting ranges for programming tool offset data are as follows:
R
o.
ZA
Se
Metric Inch
IM
11-36
Serial No. 269443
.d
Parameter N: Number P: Axis No.
ve
A 1 to 200 1001 to 1200 —
er
s
B 1 to 200 2001 to 2200 —
re
C 1 to 200 3001 to 3200 —
ts
D 1 to 144 4001 to 4144 —
gh
E 1 to 144 5001 to 5144 —
ri
F 1 to 168 (47 to 66 excluded) 6001 to 6168 —
ll
.A
I 1 to 24 9001 to 9024 1 to 16
N
J 1 to 144 10001 to 10144 —
O
K 1 to 144 11001 to 11144 —
TI
43
L 1 to 144 A
12001 to 12144 —
R
94
M 1 to 48 13001 to 13048 1 to 16
PO
26
N 1 to 48 14001 to 14048 1 to 16
R
o.
P 1 to 5 150001 to 150005 1 to 16
O
N
S 1 to 48 16001 to 16048 1 to 16
al
ZA
Se
Note: As for the setting ranges of parameter data, refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm
3
01
List/M-code List.
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
11-37
Serial No. 269443
3. Detailed description
d.
omitting them:
ve
1) Omit both L-code and P-code commands only when
ser
re
The axial data should refer to the coordinate system that was last selected.
ts
2) The L-code command only may be omitted when the intended axial data refer to a
gh
coordinate system of the same type (in terms of L-code: L2 or L20) as the last selected
ri
one; give a P-command in such a case as follows:
ll
.A
- Set an integer from 0 to 6 with address P to specify the coordinate shift data or one of
N
the coordinate systems from G54 to G59.
O
TI
- Set an integer from 1 to 300 with address P to specify one of the additional workpiece
43
PO
26
An alarm will result if the value of L mismatches the coordinate system last selected.
O
N
5. Axis data without a decimal point can be entered in the range from –99999999 to
al
K
ri
ZA
+99999999. The data settings at that time depend upon the data input unit.
Se
6. The origin data updated by a G10 command are not indicated as they are on the WORK
01
10. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check.
C
11-38
Serial No. 269443
d.
The above command sets the following data:
ve
Metric system 1.
er
Metric system (up to 4 dec. places) 0.1
s
re
Inch system 0.1
ts
Inch system (up to 5 dec. places) 0.01
gh
ri
4. The offset data updated by a G10 command are not indicated as they are on the TOOL
ll
OFFSET display until that display has been selected anew.
.A
5. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm.
N
O
6. A command of “G10 P_ R_” without an L-code is also available for tool offset data input.
TI
43
7. A
Setting an illegal P-code value causes an alarm.
R
94
PO
9. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check.
o.
O
N
C
al
ZA
Se
1. The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in
A
the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59.
IM
2. Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a sub-
K
ZA
4. No sequence number must be designated with address N in the parameter input mode.
5. The designated data will overwrite the existing parameter. Moreover, describe all the data in
3
01
decimal numbers (hexadecimal and bit type data, therefore, must be converted).
)2
11-39
Serial No. 269443
7. Some specific bit-type parameters require selection of one of multiple bits. For the
parameter shown as an example below, set data that turns on only one of bits 2 to 5.
Example: Parameter K107
bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting “1” for bits 2 and 3, for example, could not make valid a speed filter of 21.3 ms (= 7.1 + 14.2).
8. The parameter data updated by a G10 L50 command are not made valid till the execution of
d .
a G11 command.
ve
er
9. The parameter data updated by a G10 L50 command are not indicated as they are on the
s
re
PARAMETER display until that display has been selected anew.
ts
10. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm.
gh
ri
11. Setting an illegal N-code value (parameter No.) causes an alarm.
ll
12. Omission of P-code for an axis type parameter causes an alarm.
.A
N
13. Setting an illegal parameter value with address R causes an alarm.
O
TI
14. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check.
43
A
15. As for parameters (BA and SU) with separate values for each system, a G10 command is
R
94
PO
only effective for the values of the system to which the current program section belongs.
26
R
o.
4. Sample programs
N
C
al
ZA
Se
11-40
Serial No. 269443
. d
ve
–20. –10. M
er
–X
s
re
Fundamental machine
coordinate system zero point
ts
gh
ri
ll
N100
.A
Coordinate system of G54
N
before change
–X –10.
O
N101
TI
43
(W1)
Coordinate system of
A
R
94
N102
G54 after change
PO
26
–X
W1
R
o.
O
N
C
al
–20.
ri
ZA
Se
–Y
A
IM
–Y –Y
K
MEP135
ZA
A
At N101, the display of tool position in the G54 coordinate system changes before and
YA
X=0 X = +5.000
)2
Y=0 Y = +5.000
(c
Note 2: Prepare the following program to set workpiece coordinate system offset data in G54 to
ht
ig
G59:
yr
G10L2P1X–10.000 Y–10.000
op
G10L2P2X–20.000 Y–20.000
C
G10L2P3X–30.000 Y–30.000
G10L2P4X–40.000 Y–40.000
G10L2P5X–50.000 Y–50.000
G10L2P6X–60.000 Y–60.000
11-41
Serial No. 269443
C. Programming for using one workpiece coordinate system as multiple workpiece coordi-
nate systems
M
#1=–50. #2=10.
M98 P200 L5
Main program
M
M02
%
N1 G90 G54 G10 L2 P1 X#1 Y#1
N2 G00 X0 Y0
N3 X–5. F100
Subprogram N4 X0 Y–5.
(O200) N5 Y0
.d
ve
N6 #1=#1+#2
er
N7 M99
s
%
re
ts
gh
ri
–60. –50. –40. –30. –20. –10. M
ll
–X
.A
Fundamental
N
G54'''' W machine coordinate
O
–10.
TI
system zero point
43
5th cycle
G54''' WA
R
94
–20.
PO
26
4th cycle
G54'' W
R
–30.
o.
O
N
3rd cycle
G54' W
al
–40.
ri
ZA
Se
2nd cycle
G54 W
A
–50.
IM
1st cycle
K
ZA
–Y
A
MEP136
M
YA
G10L50
)2
11-42
Serial No. 269443
d .
Tool offset setting:
ve
ILLEGAL NUMBER The setting range of the offset data is overstepped.
809 Review the program data.
er
INPUT Parameter setting:
s
re
The axis number is not specified for an axis type
parameter.
ts
The setting range of the axis number or the parameter
gh
data is overstepped.
ri
Tool offset setting: Correct the offset number
ll
ILLEGAL OFFSET
.A
839 The specified offset number is greater than the number according to the number of
No.
of available data sets. available data sets.
N
O
Work offset setting:
TI
ILLEGAL G10 L A command of G10 L20 is set although the corre- Give an available L-code
43
903 A
NUMBER sponding function for the G54.1 coordinate systems is command.
R
94
not provided.
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
11-43
Serial No. 269443
d .
F93 bit 3 = 1: Tool offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data TOOL SET.
ve
er
F94 bit 2 = 1: Tool offsetting using the MAZATROL tool data is prevented from being cancelled
s
by a reference-point return command.
re
ts
F94 bit 7 = 1: Tool offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data No. (tool offset data No.).
gh
(Set F94 bit 7 to 0 to use the data stored on the TOOL OFFSET display.)
ri
ll
1. Tool offsetting
.A
N
Parameter
O
Data items used F93 F94 Programming format
TI
bit 3bit 7
43
PO
TOOL SET T_
26
TOOL DATA 1 1
R
(MAZATROL)
O
N
TOOL OFFSET +
Tool offset No. + TOOL SET 1 0 T_
ri
ZA
TOOL DATA
Se
A
IM
Parameter
ZA
bit 7 bit 7
M
YA
TOOL OFFSET +
Tool offset No. + ACT-φ 1 0 G41/G42 T_
(c
TOOL DATA
ht
ig
Parameter
C
11-44
Serial No. 269443
2. Parameter setting
Set bit 7 of parameter F92 to 1.
3. Detailed description
- Tool radius compensation uses as its offset amounts the half of the diameter data of the tool
d.
ve
which is mounted in the spindle at the issuance of G41/G42.
er
- Tool radius compensation is cancelled by G40.
s
re
Note 1: The tool used must be mounted in the spindle before restarting the program.
ts
gh
Note 2: Campensation based on tool diameter data will not occur if registered MAZATROL tool
ri
diameter data is not present or if a tool for which tool diameter data cannot be entered
ll
is to be used.
.A
Note 3: To carry out for an EIA/ISO program the tool radius compensation operations using the
N
O
tool diameter data included in MAZATROL tool data, it is necessary to insert tool
TI
change command blocks.
43
A
R
94
PO
R
o.
C
al
Tool Data Update allows MAZATROL tool data to be updated during automatic operation based
ri
ZA
Se
on an EIA/ISO program.
A
IM
2. Parameter setting
K
3. Detailed description
M
YA
This function allows the entire tool data, except for spindle tools, to be updated during automatic
3
L57 = 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
yr
op
Note 1: In the table given above, “Yes” indicates that you can update the data, and “No”
C
11-45
11
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
ht
(c
)2
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K
11-46 E
94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
G-code Function
G90 Longitudinal turning cycle
d.
G92 Threading cycle
ve
G94 Transverse turning cycle
ser
re
1. The programming format is as follows:
ts
G90 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ;
gh
(Same for G92, G94)
ri
ll
The taper values of fixed cycles G90, G92 and G94 are to be specified by argument R.
.A
2. Fixed cycle commands are modal G-codes and so they are valid until another command in
N
O
the same modal group or a cancel command is set.
TI
The following G-code cancels fixed cycle commands.
43
A
R
94
G07,
R
o.
G09,
O
N
G10,
al
ZA
Se
G31,
A
G32, G34
IM
G37,
K
G50,
ZA
G52, G53
A
M
3. There are two types of fixed cycle call, move command block call and block-by-block call.
YA
A move command block call calls the fixed cycle macro subprogram only when there is an
01
axial move command in the fixed cycle mode. The block-by-block call calls the fixed cycle
)2
macro subprogram in each block in the fixed cycle mode. Both types are executed until the
(c
4. A manual interruption can be applied while a fixed cycle for turning (G90, G92 and G94) is
yr
being executed. Upon completion of the interruption, however, the tool must be returned to
op
the position where the manual interruption was applied and then the fixed cycle for turning
C
should be restarted. If it is restarted without the tool having been returned, all subsequent
operation movements will deviate by an amount equivalent to the manual interruption value.
Note: In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of fixed cycle for turning
in one block together with any one for the following functions (described in this
chapter):
- Compound fixed cycle - Subprogram control
- Hole machining fixed cycle - Macro call
- Hole machining pattern cycle
12-1
Serial No. 269443
1. Straight turning
Continuous straight turning operations can be initiated by the following instruction:
G90 X/U_Z/W_F_;
.
3(F) 1(R)
d
2(F) 2
ve
er
Z
s
W X
re
Z-axis
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
TEP118
N
O
TI
43
2. Taper turning R
A
94
G90 X/U_Z/W_I_F_;
R
o.
O
N
ZA
A
IM
X-axis 4(R)
K
1(R) I U
3(F)
ZA
2(F) 2
A
Z
M
W X
YA
Z-axis
3
01
)2
(c
TEP119
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-2
Serial No. 269443
W W
4 U 4 1
U 3
2 3 1 2 2
. d
I
ve
X 2 I X
s er
re
Z Z
ts
gh
ri
[3] U > 0, W < 0, I < 0 [4] U > 0, W < 0, I > 0
ll
.A
N
X
X
O
TI
43
Z A
R
94
Z 2 I
PO
I
26
U 3 2 1
U 3
R
2 4 1
o.
2
O
4
N
W
al
W
ri
ZA
Se
TEP120
IM
A programming error (899 ILLEGAL TAPER LENGTH) occurs for shapes [2] and [3] unless the
K
U
|≥| I |
A
|
2
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-3
Serial No. 269443
1. Straight threading
Straight or cylindrical threading operations can be initiated by the following instruction:
G92 X/U_ Z/W_ F/E_ ;
.d
3(R) 1(R) U
ve
2(F) 2
er
Z
s
re
W X
Z-axis
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
TEP121
N
O
TI
2. Taper threading
43
A
R
94
O
N
(F) : Threading
ri
ZA
4(R)
X-axis
IM
I U
3(R) 1(R)
K
2(F) 2
ZA
Z
A
M
W X
Z-axis
YA
3
01
)2
TEP122
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-4
Serial No. 269443
.
α : Length of thread run-out
d
ve
If the thread lead is assumed to be L, then the parameter can be set by 0.1 L in
the range 0 to 4.0.
er
θ : Run-out angle of threding
s
re
The parameter (F28) can be set in 45° or 60°. TEP123
ts
gh
- In the single-block operation mode, the tool stops either at the ending points of operations 1, 3
ri
and 4, or only on completion of one cycle (depending on bit 7 of parameter F111).
ll
.A
- The feed hold function causes a non-threading operation (1, 3, or 4) to be stopped immediately,
but the threading operation (2) is either not stopped till completion of the next step (3) or
N
O
immediately changed into run-out and then stopped (according to the setting of bit 2 of
TI
parameter F111).
43
A
R
94
O
N
K
ri
ZA
W W
Se
4 4
IM
U U 1
2 3 3
1 2 2
I
K
X X
ZA
2 I
A
M
Z Z
YA
X X
)2
(c
Z Z 2 I
ht
I
ig
U 3 2 U 3 1
yr
2 4 1 2 4
op
C
W W
TEP124
A programming error (899 ILLEGAL TAPER LENGTH) occurs for shapes [2] and [3] unless the
following condition is satisfied.
U
| |≥| I |
2
- For machines with the optional function for automatic correction of threading start position, the
thread cutting conditions can be changed by “overriding” the spindle speed.
See Subsection 5-10-6 for more information.
12-5
Serial No. 269443
1. Straight facing
Continuous straight facing operations can be initiated by the following instruction:
G94 X/U_Z/W_F_;
X-axis
1(R) (R) : Rapid motion
(F) : Cutting feed
2(F) 4(R) U
2
3(F)
.
d
Z
ve
W X
er
Z-axis
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
TEP125
N
O
2. Bevel facing
TI
43
A
Continuous bevel facing operations can be initiated by the following instruction:
R
94
PO
G94 X/U_Z/W_K_F_;
26
R
o.
O
N
X-axis
K (F) : Cutting feed
al
1(R)
K
ZA
with sign)
Se
2(F) U
A
4(R) 2
IM
3(F)
Z
K
ZA
W X
Z-axis
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
TEP126
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-6
Serial No. 269443
K W K
1(R) 1(R)
U 2(F) U
2(F) 4(R)
.
2 4(R) 2
d
ve
X
er
X
3(F) 3(F)
s
re
W
ts
Z Z
gh
[3] U > 0, W < 0, K < 0 [4] U > 0, W < 0, K > 0
ri
ll
K W W
.A
N
1(R) 3(F)
O
TI
U 2(F) U
43
PO
X
26
X
3(F) 1(R)
R
o.
O
N
Z Z K
al
TEP127
ri
ZA
Se
A programming error (899 ILLEGAL TAPER LENGTH) occurs for shapes [2] and [3] unless the
A
IM
12-7
Serial No. 269443
G-code Function
G70 Finishing cycle
G71 Longitudinal roughing cycle (leaving finishing allowance)
Compound fixed cycles Ι
G72 Transverse roughing cycle (leaving finishing allowance)
G73 Contour-parallel roughing cycle
d .
G74 Longitudinal cut-off cycle
ve
Compound fixed cycles ΙΙ
er
G75 Transverse cut-off cycle
s
G76 Compound threading cycle
re
ts
- If the finish shape program has not been entered in the memory, any of the above functions for
gh
the compound fixed cycles Ι (G70 to G73) cannot be used.
ri
ll
- The programming formats are as follows.
.A
N
G-code Programming format
O
TI
G70 G70 A_P_Q_ ;
43
G71 U_R_ ; A
R
94
G71
G71 A P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ;
PO
26
G72 W_R_ ;
R
G72
o.
G72 A_P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ;
O
N
G73 U_W_R_;
al
G73
K
G73 P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ;
ri
ZA
Se
G74 R_ ;
G74
A
G74 X(U)_Z(W)_P_Q_R_F_S_T_ ;
IM
G75 R_ ;
G75
K
G75 X(U)_Z(W)_P_Q_R_F_S_T_ ;
ZA
G76 P_Q_R_ ;
A
G76
G76 X(U)_Z(W)_R_P_Q_F_ ;
M
YA
Note: In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of compound fixed cycle
3
in one block together with any one for the following functions (described in this
01
chapter):
)2
(c
12-8
Serial No. 269443
1. Overview
With commands as shown below for the finishing contour between (A) to (H), roughing by cutting
depth ∆d will be executed by leaving finishing allowances U∆u and W.
(0 or 2 for TC4)
.
d
ve
(G) (F)
(E)
er
s
re
(D) (1 for TC4)
ts
gh
45°
(C) (B)
ri
ll
.A
TEP128
N
O
The parameter TC4 will determine escape pattern from wall at right angle, whether 45° escape or
TI
feedrate accelerated at wall should be made during roughing cycle. By setting 2 for TC4,
43
A
R
94
2. Programming format
R
o.
O
N
ZA
Se
R : Escape distance
A
The value is modal and remains valid until it is overwritten with a new value.
M
U∆u : Finishing allowance and direction along the X-axis (in diameter or radius value)
(c
The roughing cycle is executed using the F-, S- and T-functions specified in or before the
op
G71 block, in stead of those existing in the program section designated by P and Q.
C
- ∆d and ∆u are both specified by address U. The differentiation depends on whether P and Q are
specified in the same block.
Note: Even if F- and S-codes exist in the program section designated by P and Q, they are
considered as for the finishing cycle only and, therefore, ignored in the roughing cycle.
12-9
Serial No. 269443
3. Detailed description
The contour of machining by G71 may be one of the four combinations below.
Machining is basically executed by feed motions along the Z-axis. Finishing allowances U∆u and
W may have different signs.
(B) (B)
+X
.
d
ve
er
(B) (B)
s
+Z
re
ts
gh
∆u < 0 ∆u < 0
W>0
ri
W<0
(C) (A) (A) (C)
ll
.A
TEP129
N
The section from A to B must be of a single-axis movement on the X-axis and is to be described
O
TI
in the block designated with P.
43
A
For the section between B and C, a maximum of 32 recesses are allowed.
R
94
PO
Depending upon whether the modal for the block of the motion from A to B is G00 or G01, the
26
infeed on the X-axis is repeated by rapid motion or cutting feed during the roughing cycle.
R
o.
O
N
C
al
(C) (A)
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
Tool path
3
01
Programmed contour
∆u/2
)2
(B) W
(c
TEP130
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-10
Serial No. 269443
.
d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
100 blocks
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
TEP131
43
A
R
94
The Z-axis position, however, must be monotonic increasing or decreasing. For shapes as
PO
26
shown below, the alarm 898 LAP CYCLE ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGN. will occur and
R
machining stops.
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
Reverse motion
on the Z-axis
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
TEP132
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-11
Serial No. 269443
4. Monotonousness of the Z-axis motion is the only requirement for the finishing contour. Even
the initial cut-in may be of simultaneous control of the X- and Z-axis, as shown below.
Initial cut-in
.d
ve
s er
TEP133
re
ts
5. If a roughing cycle command is given in the mode of nose radius compensation, the
gh
roughing cycle operations are executed for the finishing contour accordingly compensated.
ri
6. Set “W0” in general for a contour if it is not monotonic changing on the X-axis. Otherwise
ll
.A
excessive cutting is caused on either side.
N
7. In the first block of repeating section, give a command for each of the pair X(U) and Z(W). If
O
TI
no Z-axis movement is required, “W0” must be set.
43
8.
A
If the machining contour from A through B to C should contain an intermediate point whose
R
94
PO
X-position is not “below” A (as is the case with B’ in the figure below), the alarm 898 LAP
26
CYCLE ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGN. will occur. Case (Ι) is correct, while case (ΙΙ) will cause
o.
O
N
the alarm.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
(Ⅰ)
(Ⅱ)
IM
(B’)
(C)
K
(A) (A)
ZA
A
M
(C)
YA
3
(B) (B)
01
)2
(c
TEP134
ht
ig
9. M-codes in the program section designated by P and Q are only effective in the mode of
yr
G70 (finishing). They are ignored in the cycle of G71 (also G72 and G73).
op
C
12-12
Serial No. 269443
B
A
30
1
4 ∆d
3 29 5
13
19 2 14
12 6
24 20 10 9 8 18
7
11 21 A’
23 25 17 15
22
16
28 27 26
.
d
ve
er
TEP135
s
re
5. Sample programs
ts
gh
ri
ll
Cutting depth: 5.
.A
10 40 30 30 2 Escape distance: 1.
N
Workpiece Finishing allowance X: 2.
O
Z: 2.
TI
43
A
R
94
φ140 φ120
PO
φ60 φ160
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
Unit: mm
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
N003 X160.Z2.;
M
N016 X140.W-10.;
yr
N019 M30;
12-13
Serial No. 269443
1. Programming format
G72 W∆d R_;
G72 A_ P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_;
W∆d : Depth of cut
* For other addresses see the description given for G71.
∆d
B A
.
d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
Tool path
ll
.A
Programmed contour
N
U/2
O
C
TI
∆w TEP136
43
A
R
94
In G72, parameter TC4 will determine whether escape at 45° from wall should be selected or not
PO
26
in the cycle as in G71. By setting 2 for TC4, feed can be accelerated in up-going slope. (Refer to
R
o.
parameter TC3.)
N
The contour of machining by G72 may be one of the four combinations below.
al
Machining is basically executed by feed motions along the X-axis. Finishing allowances U and
ri
ZA
Se
∆w > 0 ∆w < 0
A
M
YA
X
3
Z
ht
ig
yr
U<0 U>0
op
- The section from A to B must be of a single-axis movement on the Z-axis and is to be described
in the block designated with P.
- The maximum permissible number of blocks for the finishing contour from B to C is 100,
including blocks automatically inserted by the NC.
- Depending upon whether the modal for the block of the motion from A to B is G00 or G01, the
infeed on the Z-axis is repeated by rapid motion or cutting feed during the roughing cycle.
- Nose radius compensation amount will be added to the finishing allowances U and W∆w.
12-14
Serial No. 269443
8 10 11 20 21 10
+X
+Z
. d
ve
φ176 φ120 φ82 φ35
er
Unit: mm
s
re
ts
gh
N001 G00 G96 G98;
ri
N002 G28 U0 W0;
ll
N003 T001001;
.A
N004 X176.Z2.;
N
N010 G72 W7.R1.;
O
TI
N011 G72 P012 Q018 U4.W2. F100 S100 M3;
43
PO
N014 W10.;
R
o.
N015 X82.W11.;
N
N016 W20.;
al
K
ri
ZA
N017 X35.W21;
Se
N018 W12.;
A
IM
N021 M30;
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-15
Serial No. 269443
1. Overview
This function allows efficient execution in roughing when cast or forged parts are to be cut along
the finishing contour.
∆k + ∆w
∆w
∆i + ∆u/2
. d
(A) ∆u/2
ve
s er
(C)
re
ts
∆u/2
gh
(B)
ri
∆w
ll
.A
TEP138
N
O
2. Programming format
TI
43
PO
R
o.
∆i : Escape distance and direction along the X-axis (in radius value)
O
N
The value is modal and remains valid until it is overwritten with a new value.
al
ZA
Se
The value is modal and remains valid until it is overwritten with a new value.
A
IM
d : Number of divisions
This denotes the number of roughing operations to be repeated. The value is modal and
K
Note: Even if F- and S-codes exist in the program section designated by P and Q, they are
YA
considered as for the finishing cycle only and, therefore, ignored in the roughing cycle.
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-16
Serial No. 269443
.d
A
ve
[1]
er
[1]
s
re
[1]
ts
C
[1]
gh
[1]
ri
ll
.A
B
N
TEP139
O
TI
- Nose radius compensation
43
A
If a roughing cycle command is given in the mode of nose radius compensation, the roughing
R
94
PO
cycle operations are executed for the finishing contour accordingly offset with the compen-
26
sation being temporarily canceled, and upon completion of the roughing, the compensation
R
o.
C
al
- Infeed direction
ri
ZA
The shift direction for the infeed is determined by the shape in the finishing program, as shown
Se
1 2 3 4
K
ZA
A
A1 A1
M
C C
A A C
Trace
YA
C
A A
A1 A1
3
01
TEP140
)2
12-17
Serial No. 269443
4. Parameter
- The X-axis escape distance and direction can be set by parameter TC117, whose value will be
overridden with the programmed value.
- The Z-axis escape distance and direction can be set by parameter TC118, whose value will be
overridden with the programmed value.
- The number of divisions can be set by parameter TC72, whose value will be overridden with
the programmed value.
5. Remarks
- The contour-parellel roughing cycle is executed using the F-, M-, S- and T-functions specified
d.
ve
in or before the G73 block, in stead of those existing in the program section designated by P
er
and Q.
s
re
- There are four patterns of machining as shown below. Take care to asign correct signs to the
ts
∆u, ∆w, ∆i and ∆k values.
gh
ri
ll
∆u > 0 ∆u > 0
.A
∆w < 0 ∆w > 0
N
∆i > 0 ∆i > 0
O
∆k < 0 ∆k > 0
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
∆u < 0 ∆u < 0
∆w ∆w
A
< 0 > 0
M
∆i < 0 ∆i < 0
YA
∆k < 0 ∆k > 0
3
D732S0014
01
∆i and ∆k, and ∆u and ∆w, are both specified with addresses U and W, respectively. The
)2
(c
differentiation is given by whether P and Q are specified in the same block. That is, addresses
ht
U and W without P and Q in a G73 block refer to ∆i and ∆k, while those with P and Q denote ∆u
ig
- If the contour-parellel roughing cycle is executed in the nose radius compensation mode where
the tool nose center is aligned with the starting point, the amount of nose radius compensation
is added to ∆u and ∆w.
- Others are as with G71.
12-18
Serial No. 269443
90
75
50 2 3 3
30 5
.
d
φ170
ve
er
φ150
s
re
4
ts
4
gh
2
ri
+X
ll
.A
(φ120) φ80 φ50
N
+Z
O
TI
43
A Unit: mm
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
N012 T001001;
ri
ZA
Se
N013 X150.Z5.;
A
N018 X80.Z-50.;
M
N019 Z-75.;
YA
N020 X120.Z-90.;
3
N023 M30.;
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-19
Serial No. 269443
- The finishing cycle is executed using the F-, S- and T-functions specified in the program
d.
section that is designated with A, P and Q.
ve
er
- When a G70 cycle is completed, the tool returns to the starting point in rapid motion and the
s
re
next block is read.
ts
Example 1: Designation of sequence
gh
numbers only M
ri
N100 G70 P200 Q300; N200!!!;
ll
N110 M
.A
N120 N300!!!;
N
M
O
N200
TI
M Description of the finishing contour
43
A N300
R
94
N310
PO
M
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
ZA
number
Se
M
IM
N120!!!; O100
ZA
M
M
M99;
YA
3
01
)2
In both examples 1 and 2, the N110 block is executed after the execution of the N100 cycle.
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-20
Serial No. 269443
1. Overview
This function is used for smooth disposal of machining chips in longitudinal cut-off machining.
For SS materials which produce hard-to-cut machining chips this function can be managed for
easy machining chip disposal.
2. Programming format
G74 Re;
G74 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww P∆i Q∆k R∆d Ff Ss Tt;
.d
ve
e : Return distance
er
The value is modal and remains valid until it is overwritten with a new value.
s
x/u : Final X-axis position in absolute/incremental data
re
z/w : Final Z-axis position in absolute/incremental data
ts
gh
∆i : X-axis movement step (in an absolute value)
ri
∆k : Z-axis depth of cut (in an absolute value)
ll
∆d : Tool escape distance at the bottom of cut
.A
Normally set in an absolute value. When omitting the arguments X/U and P, however, set
N
O
the value with a sign as required for the direction of escape.
TI
f : Feed function (rate of feed)
43
s : Spindle function
A
R
94
PO
t : Tool function
26
R
o.
The distance “e” is set by parameter TC74 (pecking return distance in grooving process).
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A ∆d
IM
K
ZA
∆i
A
M
U
YA
2
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
e
op
∆k
C
Z W
TEP141
12-21
Serial No. 269443
3. Detailed description
1. X (U), P and R (∆d) are not required for drilling.
15 15 15
.
d
ve
er
G00 X0 Z5.0;
s
50 5 G74 Z-50.0 Q15.0 F0.2;
re
ts
TEP142
gh
ri
2. No escape motion is performed in default of R (∆d).
ll
Normally set the R (∆d) data in an absolute value. When omitting the arguments X (U) and P
.A
for outside turning or inside boring, however, set the data with a sign as required for the
N
O
direction of escape.
TI
43
A
R
94
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
(B) (A)
IM
K
ZA
(D) (C)
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
TEP143
op
C
3. In the single-block operation mode, all the blocks are executed step by step.
12-22
Serial No. 269443
5. Sample programs
.d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
40
ri
ll
+X
.A
(φ160)
N
O
φ50 φ100
TI
+Z
43
A
R
94
PO
Unit: mm
26
R
o.
O
N
G28 U0 W0;
ri
ZA
Se
X100.Z2.;
A
G74 R2.;
IM
G28 U0 W0;
ZA
M30;
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-23
Serial No. 269443
1. Overview
This function is used for smooth disposal of machining chips in transverse cut-off machining.
This allows easy disposal of machining chips in face turning as well.
2. Programming format
G75 Re ;
G75 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R∆d F_ S_ T_ ;
.
d
ve
er
A
s
re
P
ts
e
gh
ri
ll
U
.A
2
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
Q
26
Z W ∆d
R
o.
X TEP144
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-24
Serial No. 269443
.
d
φ100
ve
60
φ90
s er
re
ts
TEP145
gh
ri
2. No escape motion is performed in default of R∆d.
ll
Normally set the R∆d data in an absolute value. When omitting the arguments Z (W) and Q
.A
for facing, however, set the data with a sign as required for the direction of escape.
N
O
TI
43
PO
26
R
o.
(C)
N
(A)
al
K
ri
ZA
∆d ∆d
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
∆d ∆d
A
M
(D)
(B)
YA
3
01
)2
(c
TEP146
yr
op
3. In the single-block operation mode, all the blocks are executed step by step.
C
12-25
Serial No. 269443
4. Remarks
1. Both G74 and G75, which are used for cutting off, grooving or drilling, are a cycle to give the
escape of a tool automatically. Four patterns which are symmetrical with each other are
available.
2. The return distance “e” can be set by parameter TC74, whose value will be overridden with
the programmed value.
3. In the single-block operation mode, all the blocks are executed step by step.
5. Sample programs
.
d
15 20
ve
+X
ser
re
ts
+Z
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
φ70
A φ100
R
94
Unit: mm
PO
26
R
o.
G28 U0 W0;
al
K
ri
X102.Z-20.;
ZA
Se
G75 R2.;
A
IM
M30;
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-26
Serial No. 269443
1. Cycle configuration
U
2
. d
ve
s er
∆d
re
ts
gh
i
ri
X k
TC82
ll
.A
N
O
TI
W
43
Z A
R
94
PO
26
Rapid traverse
O
TEP147
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Tool tip
A
IM
a
K
∆d
ZA
∆d n
A
1. cut
M
2. cut k
YA
d = SU105 3. cut
3
n-th cut
01
d/2
ht
ig
TEP148
yr
op
C
12-27
Serial No. 269443
2. Programming format
G76 Pmra Rd; (omission allowed)
G76 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ri Pk Q∆d Fl S_ T_;
d .
Choose an angle from among 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29° and 0°, and set the numeric value in
ve
er
two digits. The value is modal and remains valid until it is overwritten with a new value.
s
d : Finishing allowance
re
The value is modal and remains valid until it is overwritten with a new value.
ts
gh
i : Radial difference of threading portion
ri
Set i = 0 for parallel thread cutting.
ll
k : Thread height (along the X-axis, in radius value)
.A
∆d : First cutting depth (in radius value)
N
l : Lead of thread (as with the threading by G32)
O
TI
S, T : As with G71
43
Note:
A
“m”, “r” and “a” are commanded together by address P.
R
94
PO
When m = 2 (times), r = 1.2 (× Lead) and a = 60 (deg.), set the argument P as follows:
26
P 02 12 60
o.
O
N
m r a
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-28
Serial No. 269443
.
(C) (A)
d
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
(D) (B)
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
Rapid traverse
N
TEP149
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-29
Serial No. 269443
z w
[6] [1]
[5]
U
[2]
2
[4]
.
d
[3]
ve
er
(–i)
k
s
re
r
x
ts
a°/2
When R is negative
gh
TEP151
ri
ll
.A
z w
N
S
O
[6] [1]
TI
[5]
43
A
R
94
[2]
PO
U
26
2
R
o.
k
O
N
[4] [3]
C
al
K
ri
ZA
i
a°/2
Se
r
IM
x
K
∆d for first
YA
cutting pass
3
a°
01
Second
)2
cutting n-th
pass cutting
(c
k ∆d × 2 pass
ht
∆d × n
ig
yr
op
C
TEP153’
12-30
Serial No. 269443
.
d
under way.
ve
er
4. In the single-block operation mode, all the blocks are executed step by step. For blocks of
s
re
threading, however, the subsequent block is continuously executed.
ts
5. For machines with the optional function for automatic correction of threading start position,
gh
the thread cutting conditions can be changed by “overriding” the spindle speed.
ri
See Subsection 5-10-6 for more information.
ll
.A
N
O
+X
TI
43
E A A
R
U
94
B
PO
2
26
a ∆d
R
o.
D
O
B
N
i k k
C
x
al
C
K
2
ri
ZA
r d/2
Se
+Z C
A
IM
z w
K
ZA
A
Rapid traverse
M
YA
Cutting feed
3
D732S0016
01
)2
5. Parameter
(c
ht
- The number of repeatitions of final finishing can be set by parameter TC81, whose value will be
ig
- Length of thread run-out can be set by parameter TC82, whose value will be overridden with
op
C
12-31
Serial No. 269443
6. Detailed description
- Setting the tool tip angle provides the machining of a single tip, permitting the decrease in a
load applied to the tool tip.
- Cut amount is held constant by setting the first cut depth as ∆d and n-th cut depth as ∆d n.
Tool tip
a
B
∆d
First cut ∆d n
d.
Second cut
ve
Third cut k
er
n-th cut
s
re
ts
d/2
gh
ri
D732S0017’
ll
.A
- According to the sign of each address, four patterns are available, and inside thread can also
N
be cut.
O
TI
- Threading cycle provides the cutting feed designated by the F- or E-code only from C to D, and
43
A
R
rapid traverse for other movements.
94
PO
26
- For the cycle shown above, the signs of increment are as follows:
R
o.
K
ri
- Finishing allowance (d; diameter value) can be set by parameter (SU105) within the range as
K
follows:
ZA
12-32
Serial No. 269443
+X
80 20
+Z
1.8
d .
ve
φ60.64
er
φ68 φ100
s
1.8
re
3.68
ts
6
gh
0.1
ri
ll
.A
N
Unit: mm
O
TI
43
PO
G28 U0 W0;
26
S500 M3;
R
o.
X100.Z20.;
N
C
al
ZA
G28 U0 W0 M5;
IM
M30;
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-33
Serial No. 269443
8. Notes
1. For G76 cycle, the notes on threading are as with G32 and G92 threading. The feed hold
function causes the threading operation to be changed immediately into run-out (when F111
bit 2 = 1), as described in item 3 below.
Refer to G92 threading cycle for details.
2. The angle of run-out can be set in parameter F28 within a range from 0° to 89°, but only 45°
or 60° can actually be applied.
Setting of 90° or more validates 45°.
Setting of 0° to 45° and of 46° to 89° is taken respectively as that of 45° and 60°.
3. According to a parameter (F111 bit 2), the feed hold function brings the current threading
d .
operation in one of the following ways to a stop:
ve
- After continued execution of the next block, or
ser
- After run-out operation started immediately at an angle of 60°.
re
The feed is stopped immediately except during threading.
ts
gh
Pressing the cycle start button again causes the tool to be returned in rapid motion by
ri
simultaneous control of the X- and Z-axis to the starting point, and the cycle operation is
ll
continued.
.A
N
4. An alarm occurs in the cases below.
O
- Either X or Z is not specified.
TI
43
5. In the single-block operation mode, all the blocks are executed step by step. For blocks of
R
o.
C
al
6. The data items designated with P, Q and R are differentiated by whether addresses X (U)
K
ri
ZA
7. The cycle operation is initiated by a G76 block containing the X (U) and Z (W) data.
IM
8. For machines with the optional function for automatic correction of threading start position,
K
ZA
the thread cutting conditions can be changed by “overriding” the spindle speed.
See Subsection 5-10-6 for more information.
A
M
YA
1. Except for the preset parameters, set all the required parameters or arguments in the blocks
01
2. Provided that the finishing contour program has been registered in the memory, compound
ht
fixed cycle I commands can be executed in the memory, MDI or tape operation mode.
ig
yr
3. Take care not to use twice in the program concerned the sequence numbers that are to be
op
designated with P and Q in the blocks of G70 to G73 for fetching the description of the
C
finishing contour.
4. The maximum permissible number of blocks for the finishing contour (in the section from P
to Q specified in the blocks G71 to G73) is 100, including blocks automatically inserted by
the NC (for corner chamfering or rounding, nose radius compensation, etc.). If this number
is exceeded, a programming error occurs.
5. The finishing contour to be used for the roughing cycles of G71 to G73 must be monotonic
increasing or decreasing on either of, or both, the X- and Z-axis as appropriate.
6. Blocks without motion commands in the finishing contour section are ignored.
12-34
Serial No. 269443
d .
11. Note that the next block upon completion of the G71, G72 or G73 cycle differs depending on
ve
whether a program number or the sequence numbers only are designated.
ser
- Designation of sequence numbers only:
re
The next block is that which follows the M
ts
block designated by Q.
gh
N100 G71 P200 Q500 U_ W_!!!!;
ri
The N600 block is executed in the N200
ll
example upon completion of the cycle. N300 Description of the finishing contour
.A
N400
N
N500
O
N600
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
O
N
N200
K
N300
ZA
N400 O100
A
N10 X100.Z50.;
IM
N20
K
ZA
A
M
M
G70 command is that which follows the N100 !!!!!!!!;
3
command block.
01
N200 !!!!!!!!;
N300 !!!!!!!!;
)2
command.
M
ig
yr
M
C
13. Manual interruption can be applied during a compound fixed cycle (G70 to G76). However,
upon completion of the interruption, the tool must first be returned to the position where the
interruption was applied and then the compound fixed cycle must be restarted.
If it is restarted without the tool having been returned, all subsequent movements will
deviate by an amount equivalent to the manual interruption amount.
14. Compound fixed cycle commands are unmodal commands and so they must be set every
time they are required.
12-35
Serial No. 269443
15. Programming error LAP CYCLE ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGN. is caused for G71 and G72 if,
because of nose radius compensation, there is no further displacement of the Z-axis in the
second block or a reverse motion on the Z-axis should be made.
16. Prohibited commands in the finishing contour program section (designated with P and Q in
a block of G70 to G73) are as follows:
M98/M99
T-code
G20, G21, G94, G95, G52, G53, G68, G69
G32, G77, G78, G79
G10, G27, G28, G29, G30
17. Take care not to use twice in the program concerned the sequence numbers that are to be
d .
ve
designated with P and Q in the blocks of G70 to G73.
er
18. If the last motion command in the finishing contour program section (designated with P and
s
re
Q in a block of G70 to G73) is for corner chamfering (G01 X_ I_ ) (G01 Z_ K_ ) or corner
ts
rounding (G01 Z_ R_ ) (G01 X_ R_ ), alarm NO DIRECTIVE FOR NEXT MOVE R/C occurs.
gh
19. The block designated with P in a G71, G72 or G73 command must be in the G00 or G01
ri
mode.
ll
.A
20. For a manual “handle” interruption (to shift the tool position) after feed hold during execution
N
of the G70 to G76 cycle, the tool must be returned to the original position before pressing
O
TI
the cycle start button to continue the operation.
43
A
If the operation is restarted without the tool having been returned, all subsequent move-
R
94
PO
O
N
21. The example below is given to show the execution timing of an M- or T-function code
C
al
ZA
Se
M
ZA
N102 Z-20.;
YA
TEP155
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-36
Serial No. 269443
12-3-1 Outline
d .
ve
Hole machining Hole machining Operation at hole Return
G-code Application
er
axis operation bottom movement
s
G80 — — — — Cancel
re
Cutting feed, Normal/High-speed
ts
G83 Z Dwell Rapid feed
intermittent feed deep hole drilling cycle
gh
Dwell, spindle
ri
G84 Z Cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping cycle
reverse rotation
ll
G85 Z Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring cycle
.A
Spindle reverse Synchronous tapping
N
G84.2 Z Cutting feed Cutting feed
rotation cycle
O
TI
Cutting feed, Normal/High-speed
G87 X Dwell Rapid feed
43
Dwell, spindle
G88 X Cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping cycle
PO
reverse rotation
26
rotation cycle
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A fixed cycle mode is cancelled when the G80 or any G-code in the 01 group is set. The various
A
Note: In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of hole machining fixed
K
ZA
cycle in one block together with any one for the following functions (described in this
chapter):
A
M
12-37
Serial No. 269443
2. Programming format
d .
ve
G8" Z/W_ C/H_ X/U_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ M_;
er
M-code
s
re
Number of repetitions
Hole machining data
ts
Hole positioning data
gh
Hole machining mode (G87, G88, G88.2, G89)
ri
ll
C. Cancel
.A
N
G80 ;
O
TI
D. Data outline and corresponding address
43
A
R
94
These are the fixed cycle modes for drilling (G83, G87), tapping (G84, G84.2, G88, G88.2) and
R
o.
These are modal commands and once they have been set, they will remain valid until another
al
hole machining mode command, the cancel command for the hole machining fixed cycle or a G
ri
ZA
Se
These are unmodal data, and they are commanded block by block when the same hole
machining mode is to be executed continuously.
A
M
Except for Q, they are modal. Q in the G83 or G87 command is unmodal and is commanded
01
- Number of repetitions:
(c
ht
This number is designated for machining holes at equal intervals when the same cycle is to be
ig
repeated.
yr
The setting range is from 0 through 9999 and the decimal point is not valid.
op
The number is unmodal and is valid only in the block in which it has been set. When this
C
number is not designated, it is treated as K1. When K0 is deisgnated, the hole machining data
are stored in the memory but no holes will be machined.
- M-code:
Commanding M210 causes M-code for C-axis clamping to be outputted at the start of operation
2 (described later), and M-code for C-axis unclamping to be outputted at the end of operation 5.
For G84 (G88) and G84.2 (G88.2), M-code for the direction of spindle revolution is specified. If
not specified, the preset data of the respective parameter will be used.
12-38
Serial No. 269443
Address Signification
G Selection of hole machining cycle sequence (G80, G83, G84, G84.2, G85, G87, G88, G88.2, G89)
.d
X/U, (Z/W)*, C/H Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental value)
ve
Z/W, (X/U)* Designation of hole bottom position (absolute/incremental value from reference point)
er
R Designation of R(apid feed)-point position (incremental value from initial point) (sign ignored.)
s
re
Designation of cut amount for each cutting pass in G83 (G87); always incremental value, radial
ts
Q value (sign ignored, decimal point can be commanded in T32 compatible mode, but not in
gh
Standard mode)
Designation of dwell time at hole bottom point; relationship between time and designated value is
ri
P
same as for G04.
ll
.A
F Designation of feed rate for cutting feed
N
K Designation of number of repetitions, 0 to 9999 (default = 1)
O
M Designation of M-code
TI
D Selection of the spindle used for hole machining (for G84.2 only)
43
A
R
* Addresses in parentheses apply for commands G87, G88 and G89.
94
PO
26
E. Use of the hole machining fixed cycles on the 2nd spindle side
R
o.
O
N
The hole machining fixed cycles can also be used for the lower turret on the 2nd spindle side with
C
al
ZA
Se
3. Outline drawing
A
IM
The hole machining axes for the hole machining fixed cycle and the positioning are shown in the
K
z4
)2
[4] r4
ht
[1]
ig
q4
[2]
yr
op
q2
x4
C
r2 Rotary tool
z2 for X-axis
x2 +X +Z
C
[1] G83 Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 ;
[2] G83 Xx2 Cc2 Zz2 Rr2 Qq2 Pp2 Ff2 Kk2 ;
[3] G87 Zz3 Cc3 Xx3 Rr3 Qq3 Pp3 Ff3 Kk3 ;
12-39
Serial No. 269443
4. Operations
There are 7 actual operations which are each described in turn below.
Operation 3
Operation 7
R-point
Operation 6
Operation 4
.
d
ve
Operation 5
TEP156
er
s
re
Operation 1 : Positionning by rapid feed to the X(Z) and C-axis initial point
ts
Operation 2 : Output of the M-code for C-axis clamping if it is set
gh
Operation 3 : Positionning to the R-point by rapid traverse
ri
Operation 4 : Hole machining by cutting feed
ll
.A
Operation 5 : Operation at the hole bottom position which differs according to the fixed cycle
N
mode. Possible actions include rotary tools reverse rotation (M204), rotary tools
O
forward rotation (M203) and dwell.
TI
43
(Operation 6 and 7 may be a single operation depending on the fixed cycle mode.)
R
o.
Whether the fixed cycle is to be completed at operation 6 or 7 can be selected by the user
O
N
ZA
Se
12-40
Serial No. 269443
Initial point
Initial point (Mβ) (Mα)
(Mα)
r
r
R-point
R-point q (Mβ)
.
q
d
ve
d
d q
er
q d
d
s
re
q
q
ts
(P)
gh
(P) Z point Z point
ri
D740PB0029
ll
.A
- Return distance “d” is set by the parameter (F12: Pecking return distance in drilling process).
N
The tool returns at rapid traverse.
O
- (Mα): The C-axis clamping M-code (Mm) is outputted here if specified.
TI
43
- (Mβ): The C-axis unclamping M-code (C-axis clamp M-code + 1 = Mm+ 1) is output
A
R
94
- (P): Dwell is performed for the duration equivalent to the time designated by P.
R
o.
C
al
ZA
Se
Initial point
K
(Mα) (Mα)
A
M
YA
TEP158
yr
op
12-41
Serial No. 269443
R-point (Mβ)
R-point (Mβ)
Forward rotation
.
Forward rotation
d
of rotary tool
ve
of rotary tool
er
Reverse rotation Reverse rotation
Z point (P)
s
of rotary tool of rotary tool Z point (P)
re
TEP159
ts
gh
- (Mα), (Mβ) and (P) are as with G83.
ri
ll
- During the execution G84 (G88), the override cancel status is established and 100 % override
.A
is automatically applied. Dry run is also ignored.
N
O
- When feed hold is applied during the execution of G84 (G88), block stop results after return
TI
43
movement. R
A
94
R
o.
K
ri
ZA
Se
(Mα) (Mα)
ZA
A
M
R-point (Mβ)
YA
R-point (Mβ)
3
f 2f f 2f
01
)2
TEP160
ig
yr
- The tool returns to the R-point at a cutting feed rate which is double the designated feed rate
C
command. However, it does not exceed the maximum cutting feed rate.
12-42
Serial No. 269443
.
of rotary tool
d
of rotary tool
ve
er
Reverse rotation Reverse rotation
of rotary tool Z point (P) of rotary tool Z point (P)
s
re
ts
TEP159
gh
ri
1. Detailed description
ll
.A
- (Mα), (Mβ) and (P) are as with G83.
N
- The spindle is reversed at the hole bottom to perform tapping cycle. During tapping cycle
O
operation by G84.2 (G88.2), feed rate override is ignored. Even if feed hold is applied, the cycle
TI
43
PO
- Specify the special argument C1 with a leading comma (,C1) when the direction of hole
26
O
N
- Tapping cycle and reverse tapping cycle can be performed by specifying spindle normal or
C
al
ZA
Se
- As for synchronous tapping on the face (G84.2), the combination of the direction of the Z-axis
01
movement (in the workpiece coordinate system) and that of the spindle rotation determines the
)2
Negative M03/M203
C
Normal tapping
Positive M04/M204
Negative M04/M204
Reverse tapping
Positive M03/M203
Programming example:
1) G00 Z0.
G84.2 Z10. F0.1 M4 ......... Normal tapping
2) G00 Z0.
G84.2 Z–10. F0.1 M4 ....... Reverse tapping
12-43
Serial No. 269443
- When G84.2 is commanded by feed per revolution (G95), where the unit of cutting feed rate F
is set to mm/rev or in/rev, tap thread pitch can be commanded directly.
- Give a G88.2 command, in place of G84.2, to use the X-axis as a hole machining axis.
- In tapping cycle (G84), the feed rate of Z-axis per spindle rotation must be equal to the thread
pitch of a tap. This means that the most desirable tapping always fills the following conditions.
P = F/S
P : Tap thread pitch (mm)
F : Z-axis feed rate (mm/min)
S : Spindle speed (min–1)
Spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are independently controlled in tapping cycle (G84). Therefore,
d .
the above condition are not always filled. Spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are both decelerated
ve
and stopped particularly at the hole bottom, and then the spindle and Z-axis move in the
er
reverse direction, giving acceleration.
s
re
Since each acceleration and deceleration are independently performed, the above conditions
ts
are not filled usually. As a result, for improving the accuracy of tapping, it is customary to
gh
compensate the feed by mounting a spring in the tap holder.
ri
ll
On the other hand, for synchronous tapping cycle (G84.2), spinde rotation and Z-axis feed are
.A
controlled so that they are always synchronized. In other words, for normal rotation, the spindle
N
is controlled only in relation to speed. However, for synchronous tapping, position control is
O
TI
given also to spindle rotation. And spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are controlled as the linear
43
A
interpolation of two axes. This fills the condition of P = F/S even in deceleration and accele-
R
94
PO
R
o.
2. Remarks
O
N
C
al
1. Synchronous tapping cycle (G84.2) and tapping cycle (G84) differ only in the control method
K
ri
ZA
of spindle when Z-axis moves from point R to point Z and when it does from point Z to point
Se
shown below, and position control is given. Spindle motor is controlled like a servo motor to
K
The movement distance of linear interpolation of Z-axis and spindle as well as the feed rate
A
Synchronous tapping cycle is as with G84 except that it differs from tapping cycle in the
op
control method of spindle when Z-axis moves from point R to point Z and when it does from
C
point Z to point R. Refer to the section of fixed cycle G84 for the notes including
programming.
2. Z-axis is used as a hole machining axis in the above description. Give a G88.2 command to
use the X-axis as a hole machining axis.
Example: G88.2 Z/W_ C/H_ X/U_ R_ F_ ; X-axis is used as a hole machining axis.
3. For synchronous tapping cycle (G84.2), feed rate override is invalid, and it is fixed to 100%.
12-44
Serial No. 269443
.
d
command is present in the block.
ve
3. The hole machining data (Q, P) should be commanded in the block (block including the
ser
basic axis, additional axis and R data) in which the holes are machined.
re
The modal data will not be updated even if these data are commanded in a non-hole
ts
machining block.
gh
ri
4. When resetting is applied during the execution of the G85 (G89) command, the hole
ll
machining data will be erased.
.A
N
5. The hole machining fixed cycles are also cancelled by any G code in the 01 group besides
O
G80. If it is commanded in the same block as the fixed cycle, the fixed cycle will be ignored.
TI
43
O
N
ZA
Se
6. When a miscellaneous command is set in the same block as the fixed cycle command, it is
A
However, the C-axis unclamping M-code (clamp M + 1) is output after the holes have been
YA
When the number of repetitions has been designated, the M command execution in above
)2
condition is exercised only for the initial operation except for the C-axis clamping M-code.
(c
In the case of the C-axis clamping/unclamping M commands, as they are modal, the codes
ht
are outputted with each repetitions until the operation is cancelled by the fixed cycle cancel
ig
command.
yr
op
7. When a tool position offset command (T function) is set in a hole machining fixed cycle
C
12-45
Serial No. 269443
d .
2. Face tapping cycle (G84) 6. Outside boring cycle (G89)
ve
G00 G97 G98; G00 G97 G98;
er
G28 UW; G28 UW;
s
re
M200; M200;
ts
M203 S600; M203 S800;
gh
X100.Z2.C0; X102. Z–50.C0;
G84 X50.H30.Z–20.R5.P.2 F300 K3 M203 M210; G89 Z–50. H30.X–70. R5.P.2 F200 K3 M210;
ri
G80; G80;
ll
.A
G28 UW; G28 UW;
M30; M30;
N
O
TI
3. Face boring cycle (G85) 7. Face synchronous tapping cycle (G84.2)
43
M200; M200;
R
X100.Z2.C0; X100.Z2.C0;
N
G80; G80;
ri
ZA
Se
M30; M30;
IM
4. Outside deep hole drilling cycle (G87) 8. Outside synchronous tapping cycle (G88.2)
K
ZA
M200; M200;
YA
G80; G80;
)2
M30; M30;
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-46
Serial No. 269443
12-4-1 Overview
.
d
ve
- The execution of this command begins with the positioning to the first one of the arranged holes.
er
The type of hole machining depends on the corresponding cycle designated last.
s
re
- The current mode of hole-machining cycle will remain active over the execution of this
ts
command till it is cancelled explicitly.
gh
ri
- This command will only activate positioning when it is given in any other mode than those of
ll
hole-machining cycle.
.A
- These commands only cause positioning at the speed of the current modal condition (of G-
N
O
code group 01) in default of any preceding hole-machining cycle.
TI
43
Note: Hole machining pattern cycles are only available for machines with the Y-axis control
A
R
94
function. Apply the coordinate conversion function for arranging hole positions in a
PO
26
O
N
K
ri
Note: In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of hole machining pattern
YA
cycle in one block together with any one for the following functions (described in this
3
chapter):
01
)2
As shown in the format below, a command of G234.1 determines a circle of radius “r” around the
center designated by X and Y. The circumference is then divided, beginning from the point of the
central angle “θ”, regularly by “n”, and the hole machining designated beforehand by a fixed cycle
(G83 etc.) will be done around all the vertices of the regular n-gon.
The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data
of the G234.1 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution.
12-47
Serial No. 269443
1. Programming format
G234.1 Xx Yy Ir Jθ Kn;
X, Y : Coordinates of the center of the circle.
I : Radius (r) of the circle. Always given in a positive value.
J : Central angle (θ) of the first hole. Positive central angles refer to counterclockwise
measurement.
K : Number (n) of holes to be machined. (Setting range: from –9999 to 9999)
The algebraic sign of argument K refers to the rotational direction of the sequential
machining of “n” holes. Set a positive and a negative number respectively for
counterclockwise and clockwise rotation.
2. Sample programes
d.
Given below is an example of G83 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions.
ve
er
N001 G122.1;
s
re
N002 G83 Z-10. R5. K0. F200;
ts
N003 G234.1 U20. V-30. I20. J20. K-6;
gh
N004 G80;
ri
N005 G123.1;
ll
.A
X
N
O
θ = 20°
TI
43
A Y
R
94
PO
26
r = 20
R
o.
O
N
u = 20
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
n=6
A
G234.1 execution
K
D740PB0022
ZA
A
Use the coordinate conversion function as follows to arrange hole positions in the ZY-plane:
M
YA
N001 G122.1;
N002 G68.5 X0 Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R90.;
3
01
N005 G80;
ig
N006 G69.5;
yr
op
N007 G123.1;
C
3. Notes
- Give a G122.1 command as required beforehand to specify in a radius value the X-axis
position in the block of hole machining pattern cycle.
- Use the appropriate axis addresses to designate the axis position in an incremental value.
- The last position of the G234.1 command is on the last one of the arranged holes. Use the
method of absolute data input, therefore, to specify the movement to the position for the next
operation desired. (An incremental command would require a more or less complicated
calculation with respect to that last hole.)
12-48
Serial No. 269443
1. Programming format
G235 Xx Yy Id Jθ Kn;
X, Y : Coordinates of the starting point.
d .
I : Interval (d) between holes. Change of sign for argument I causes a centrically
ve
symmetric hole arrangement with the starting point as the center.
er
s
J : Angle (θ) of the line. Positive angles refer to counterclockwise measurement.
re
K : Number (n) of holes to be machined (from 1 to 9999), inclusive of the starting point.
ts
gh
2. Sample programes
ri
ll
Given below is an example of G83 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions.
.A
N001 G122.1;
N
O
N002 G83 Z–10. R5. K0. F100;
TI
N003 G235 U20. V-10. I25. J30. K3;
43
N004 G80;
A
R
94
PO
26
N005 G123.1;
R
o.
O
N
X
C
n=3
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Y
A
d = 25
IM
θ = 30°
K
ZA
A
u = 20
M
YA
D740PB0023
)2
(c
Use the coordinate conversion function as follows to arrange hole positions in the ZY-plane:
ht
N001 G122.1;
ig
yr
12-49
Serial No. 269443
3. Notes
- Give a G122.1 command as required beforehand to specify in a radius value the X-axis
position in the block of hole machining pattern cycle.
- Use the appropriate axis addresses to designate the axis position in an incremental value.
- Omission of argument K or setting “K0” will result in a programming error. A setting of K with
five or more digits will lead to the lowest four digits being used.
- In a block with G235 any words with addresses other than G, L, N, X, Y, U, V, I, J, K, F, M, S, T
and B will simply be ignored.
- Giving a G-code of group 00 in the same block with G235 will cause an exclusive execution of
either code which is given later.
d.
ve
- In a block with G235 a G22 or G23 command will simply be ignored without affecting the
er
execution of the G235 command.
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-50
Serial No. 269443
1. Programming format
G236 Xx Yy Ir Jθ P∆θ Kn;
d.
X, Y : Coordinates of the center of the arc.
ve
I : Radius (r) of the arc. Always given in a positive value.
ers
J : Central angle (θ) of the first hole. Positive central angles refer to counterclockwise
re
measurement.
ts
P : Angular interval (∆θ) between holes. The algebraic sign of argument P refers to the
gh
rotational direction of the sequential machining of “n” holes. Set a positive and a
ri
negative value respectively for counterclockwise and clockwise rotation.
ll
.A
K : Number (n) of holes to be machined (from 1 to 9999).
N
O
2. Sample programes
TI
43
A
Given below is an example of G83 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions.
R
94
PO
N001 G122.1;
26
N004 G80;
al
K
ri
ZA
N005 G123.1;
Se
A
IM
X
K
n=5
ZA
Y
A
∆θ = 30°
M
YA
θ = –70°
3
01
u = 30
)2
(c
D740PB0024
yr
op
C
Use the coordinate conversion function as follows to arrange hole positions in the ZY-plane:
N001 G122.1;
N002 G68.5 X0 Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R90.;
N003 G17 X0 Y0 Z2.5;
N004 G83 Z-10. R5. K0 F200;
N005 G236 X30. Y-20. I25. J-70. P30. K5;
N005 G80;
N006 G69.5;
N007 G123.1;
12-51
Serial No. 269443
3. Notes
- Give a G122.1 command as required beforehand to specify in a radius value the X-axis
position in the block of hole machining pattern cycle.
- Use the appropriate axis addresses to designate the axis position in an incremental value.
.
of machining occurs in the X-axis direction.
d
ve
The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data
er
of the G237.1 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution.
s
re
ts
1. Programming format
gh
G237.1 Xx Yy I∆x Pnx J∆y Kny;
ri
ll
X, Y : Coordinates of the starting point.
.A
I : Hole interval (∆x) on the X-axis. Set a positive and a negative value to arrange holes
N
in respective directions from the starting point on the X-axis.
O
P : Number (nx) of holes to be arranged on the X-axis (from 1 to 9999).
TI
43
J A
: Hole interval (∆y) on the Y-axis. Set a positive and a negative value to arrange holes
R
94
O
N
2. Sample programs
C
al
Given below is an example of G83 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions.
ri
ZA
Se
N001 G122.1;
A
IM
N004 G80;
A
N005 G123.1;
M
YA
X
ny = 5
3
01
)2
Y
(c
∆x = 25
ht
nx = 3
ig
yr
op
C
u = 30
∆y = –30
Last position before
v = 20 G237.1 execution
D740PB0025
12-52
Serial No. 269443
3. Notes
d.
- Give a G122.1 command as required beforehand to specify in a radius value the X-axis
ve
er
position in the block of hole machining pattern cycle.
s
re
- Use the appropriate axis addresses to designate the axis position in an incremental value.
ts
- Omission of argument P or K, or setting “P0” or “K0” will result in a programming error. A setting
gh
of K or P with five or more digits will lead to the lowest four digits being used.
ri
ll
- In a block with G237.1 any words with addresses other than G, L, N, X, Y, U, V, I, J, K, F, M, S,
.A
T and B will simply be ignored.
N
O
- Giving a G-code of group 00 in the same block with G237.1 will cause an exclusive execution
TI
of either code which is given later.
43
A
R
94
- In a block with G237.1 a G22 or G23 command will simply be ignored without affecting the
PO
26
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-53
Serial No. 269443
. d
O0010; O1000; O1200; O2000; O5000;
ve
er
N20;
s
M98P1000; M98P1200 M98P2000; M98P2500;
re
Q20;
ts
gh
N60;
M02; M99; M99; M99P60; M99;
ri
ll
(Level 1) (Level 2) (Level 3) (Level 8)
.A
N
Nesting depth
O
TEP161
TI
43
A
The table below shows the functions which can be executed by adding and combining the tape
R
94
storing and editing functions, subprogram control functions and fixed cycle functions.
PO
26
O
N
ZA
Function
K
1. Memory operation # # # #
ZA
3. Subprogram call × # # ×
M
YA
Note: In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of subprogram control in
ig
one block together with any one for the following functions (described in this chapter):
yr
op
12-54
Serial No. 269443
Alternatively,
M98 P_ Q_ L_;
.
Number of subprogram repetitions (L1 if omitted)
d
ve
Sequence number in subprogram to be called (head block if omitted)
er
Program number [composed of numerals only] of subprogram to be called (own program if
s
re
omitted). P can only be omitted during memory operation.
ts
Return to main program from subprogram
gh
ri
M99 P_ L_;
ll
Number of times after repetition number has been changed
.A
Sequence number of return destination (returned to block following block of call if omitted)
N
O
TI
3. Creating and entering subprograms
43
A
Subprograms have the same format as machining programs for normal memory operation
R
94
PO
except that the subprogram completion instruction M99 (P_ L_) is entered as an independent
26
O
N
O∆∆∆∆ ;
C
...............;
ri
ZA
Se
...............;
A
...............;
K
%(EOR) End of record code (% with ISO code and EOR with EIA code)
A
M
The above program is registered by editing operations. For further details, refer to the section on
YA
program editing.
3
Only those subprograms numbers ranging from 1 through 9999 designated by the optional
01
specifications can be used. When there are no program numbers on the tape, the setting number
)2
Up to 8 nesting levels can be used for calling programs from subprograms, and program error
ht
ig
Main programs and subprograms are registered in order in which they were read because no
op
distinction is made between them. This means that main programs and subprograms should not
C
be given the same numbers. (If the same numbers are given, error occurs during entry.)
12-55
Serial No. 269443
;
O#### ;
.................; Subprogram A
M
M99;
%
;
O∆∆∆∆ ;
.................; Subprogram B
M
.
M99;
d
ve
%
ser
;
re
O"""" ;
ts
gh
.................; Subprogram C
M
ri
ll
M99;
.A
%
N
O
Note 1: Main programs can be used during memory and tape operation but subprograms must
TI
43
PO
Note 2: The following commands are not the object of subprogram nesting and can be called
26
- Fixed cycles
N
C
al
- Pattern cycles
K
ri
ZA
Se
4. Subprogram execution
A
IM
Programming format
A
M
For example,
yr
M98 P1;
C
M98 P1;
M98 P1;
12-56
Serial No. 269443
.
d
ve
Sequence of execution: [1]→[2]→[3]→[3]’→[2]’→[1]’
s er
TEP162
re
ts
For nesting, the M98 and M99 commands should always be paired off on a 1 : 1 basis [1]' for [1],
gh
[2]' for [2], etc.
ri
Modal information is rewritten according to the execution sequence without distinction between
ll
.A
main programs and subprograms. This means that after calling a subprogram, attention must be
N
paid to the modal data status when programming.
O
Example 2: The M98 Q_ ; and M99 P_ ; commands designate the sequence numbers in a
TI
43
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
M98Q_; M99P_;
C
al
O123;
ri
ZA
M98Q3; N100__;
Se
Search M98P123;
IM
N200__;
N3__; N300__;
K
N400__;
ZA
M
M99; M
A
M99P100;
M
YA
TEP163
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-57
Serial No. 269443
d.
O3;
ve
M
er
N200 Subprogram 3
s
re
M
ts
M99;
gh
%
ri
ll
.A
- When the O2 N200 block is searched with the memory search function, the modal data are
N
updated according to the related data of O2 to N200.
O
- The same sequence number can be used in different subprograms.
TI
43
A
- When the subprogram (No. p1) is to be repeatedly used, it will be repeatedly executed for I1
R
94
PO
R
o.
5. Other precautions
O
N
C
al
- Programming error occurs when the designated program number (P) is not found.
K
ri
ZA
Se
- Single block stop does not occur in the M98P _ ; and M99 ; block. If any address except O, N, P,
A
Q or L is used, single block stop can be executed. (With X100. M98 P100 ; operation branches
IM
- When M99 is commanded in the main program, operation returns to the head.
A
- Operation can branch from tape or PTR operation to a subprogram by M98P_ but the
M
sequence number of the return destination cannot be designated with M99P_ ;. (P_ is ignored.)
YA
- Care should be taken that the search operation will take time when the sequence number is
3
01
designated by M99P_ ;
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-58
Serial No. 269443
G109L1 G109L1
M (for machining with
(for machining Upper turret)
M Executed
with Upper turret)
M99
d.
M98<1000>
ve
ser
G109L2
re
.
. (for machining with
.
ts
Lower turret) Skipped
gh
M
ri
ll
.A
Pattern 2:
N
Subprogram (WNo. 2000)
O
Main program (EIA/ISO)
TI
43
M
G109L1 A
(for machining with
R
94
M
o.
O
N
M98<2000>
C
al
K
ri
ZA
G109L2
Se
M
K
M99
ZA
A
- The Z- and C-offset values stored on the SET UP MANAG. display for the main program will
M
remain intact for the execution of a subprogram prepared in the EIA/ISO format.
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-59
Serial No. 269443
A. Overview
MAZATROL machining program can be called as a subprogram from the machining program
described with EIA/ISO codes.
EIA/ISO → MAZATROL (Program call)
MAZATROL (WNo. 1000)
EIA/ISO
MAZATROL machining program is called
from EIA/ISO program, and entire
machining program can be used.
.
d
M98P1000;
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
Note 1: When the execution of MAZATROL machining program is completed, the execution is
ll
returned again to EIA/ISO program.
.A
It should be noted that the used tool, current position and others are changed though
N
O
EIA/ISO modal information is not changed.
TI
43
Note 2: MAZATROL programs (with commands for both the upper and lower turret) can
A
R
94
of similar structure on condition that one and the same program is called up on
R
o.
Example:
al
K
ri
G109L1
with Upper turret
M
M
K
M950
M
ZA
M98<3000>
A
M
M
01
M950
M98<3000>
)2
(c
ht
ig
Note 3: The Z- and C-offset values used for the execution of a MAZATROL program as a
yr
subprogram called up from an EIA/ISO program depend upon the setting of parameter
op
12-60
Serial No. 269443
C. Detailed description
.
d
ve
1. END unit of the MAZATROL program
er
The END unit of the MAZATROL program to be called must have “1” specified under CONTI.
s
re
for correct return to the EIA/ISO main program.
ts
As for the END unit’s items other than CONTI.: Even if WORK No. is specified, program
gh
chain cannot be made with the MAZATROL program called from an EIA/ISO program.
ri
ll
EIA/ISO MAZATROL
.A
N
O
M98
UNIT CONTI. WORK No.
TI
END 1 ∗∗∗ Ignored
43
A
R
94
Impossible
PO
MAZATROL
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Also, REPEAT and SHIFT are ignored even if they are specified.
A
IM
When MAZATROL program is called from EIA/ISO program, the MAZATROL program is
ZA
MAZATROL program is executed independently of EIA/ISO program which has made the
M
call. In other words, it performs the same machining as MAZATROL program alone is
YA
executed. When calling MAZATROL program, always place a tool outside the safety profile
3
beforehand. Failure to do this may cause interference of a workpiece with the tool.
01
)2
Note: The END unit of the MAZATROL program to be called from an EIA/ISO program must
(c
have “1” specified under CONTI. for correct return to the EIA/ISO main program. Never
ht
D. Remarks
yr
op
1. MDI interruption and macro interruption signal during MAZATROL program execution are
C
ignored.
2. MAZATROL program cannot be restarted halfway.
3. MAZATROL program call in the mode of a fixed cycle results in an alarm.
4. MAZATROL program call in the mode of nose radius compensation results in an alarm.
5. MAZATROL program call is not available in the MDI operation mode (results in an alarm).
6. A MAZATROL program called by M98 cannot be executed but in its entirety (from the head
to the end).
7. Commands to addresses other than O, N, P, Q, L and H in a block of M98 for MAZATROL
program call will not be processed till completion of the called program.
12-61
Serial No. 269443
. d
ve
Specification of execution or non-execution of parts count
(counting updated on POSITION display)
er
0: Parts count non-execution
s
re
1: Parts count execution
ts
Name of the program to be executed next
gh
M-code for program chain
M998: Continuous execution after parts count and work No. search
ri
M999: Ending after parts count and work No. search
ll
.A
As shown below, the next program can be designated alternatively with address S if its
N
“name” consists of numerals only.
O
TI
M998(999) S111 Q1;
43
A
R
94
O
N
ZA
M998: Continuous execution after parts count and work No. search
Se
- M998<####>
K
ZA
EIA/ISO program
↓ ↓
A
↓ MAZATROL program ↓
M
↓ or ↓
YA
EIA/ISO program
↓ ↓
3
↓ ↓
01
M998<####>
)2
(c
MAZATROL or EIA/ISO program is called from EIA/ISO program and executed as the next
ht
program.
ig
yr
- M999<####>
op
C
EIA/ISO program
↓
↓ MAZATROL program
↓ or
EIA/ISO program
↓
↓
M999<####>
MAZATROL or EIA/ISO program is only called from EIA/ISO program and the operation is
terminated.
12-62
Serial No. 269443
M950
M999<1000>
.d
ve
G109L2
er
M
G109L2
s
M
re
ts
M950
gh
M999<1000>
ri
ll
Example 2: Wrong use
.A
Subprogram (WNo. 1000)
N
Main program (EIA/ISO)
O
G109L1
TI
G109L1
43
M A
R
94
M
PO
26
M950
R
o.
M998<1000>
O
N
G109L2
al
G109L2
ri
M
ZA
Se
M
A
IM
M950
M999<1000>
K
ZA
Note 2: In order to prevent the machine operation from being inconveniently stopped, the NC
A
will process a block of M998Q1 automatically as that of M999Q1 in case the total
M
YA
number of machined parts should amount to, or exceed, the preset number of parts
required.
3
01
Note 3: Omission of the designation of the next program, be it by name or number, will result in
)2
1. Overview
C
Chamfering or corner rounding can be commanded between two blocks specified by linear
interpolation (G01). For I, J and K, radial data must be always set.
12-63
Serial No. 269443
70
30 (b)
C3
(c)
d .
Z
ve
TEP169
s er
re
2. Detailed description
ts
gh
1. For chamfering or corner rounding, movement commanded by G01 must be displacement
ri
in the X- or Z-axis only. In the second block, a command perpendicular to the first axis must
ll
be given in the Z- or X-axis.
.A
N
2. The starting point of the second block is the ending point of the first block.
O
Example: G01 Z270.0 R6;
TI
43
X860.0 K–3; A
The starting point of this block has Z270.0 as Z coordinate.
R
94
PO
O
N
K
ri
- In a block next to the block commanding chamfering or corner rounding, command G01 is
ZA
5. Execution by single step mode will require two steps to complete the operation.
3
01
6. When M, T commands are included in the same block, execution point must be considered.
)2
N014 X100.;
op
N014
C
N012
N013
12-64
Serial No. 269443
.
point
d
d d ≤ e – 2i
ve
a→b→c→d
s er
a Starting
re
b point Specify the point “e”.
ts
G01 X(U)e Kk; k c d Specify the data only for Z-axis
gh
Z(W)d; ........ Next block e in the next block.
ri
k d≥e+k
ll
a→b→c→d
.A
Chamfering
X→Z
N
a Starting
O
point Specify the point “e”.
b
TI
G01 X(U)e K–k; Specify the data only for Z-axis
43
d c
A k
Z(W)d; ........ Next block in the next block.
R
94
e
k d≤e–k
PO
26
a→b→c→d
R
o.
d
N
Starting
C
ZA
a b e
d ≥ e + 2r
A
Corner
IM
a→b→c→d
rounding
Z→X a b e
K
Starting
G01 Z(W)e R–r; point r c Specify the data only for X-axis
A
d ≤ e – 2r
YA
a→b→c→d
a
3
Starting
01
point
Specify the point “e”.
)2
r
Z(W)d; ........ Next block b in the next block.
ht
c d d≥e+r
ig
e a→b→c→d
Corner
yr
rounding
op
12-65
Serial No. 269443
1. Function
The arbitrary corner is chamferred between two points on the two lines which form this corner
and displaced by the lengths commanded by “, C_” from their intersection point.
.
d
ve
2. Programming format
er
s
re
N100 G01 X_ Z_ ,C_;
Chamfering is performed at the point where N100 and N200
ts
N200 G01 X_ Z_;
gh
intersect.
ri
Length up to chamfering starting point or ending point from virtual
ll
corner intersection point
.A
N
3. Example of program
O
TI
(a) G01 W100.,C10.F100;
43
(b) U280.W100.; A
R
94
PO
26
X
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
(b)
Virtual corner
Se
Chamfering Chamfering
starting point ending point
K
ZA
(a) 10.0
A
M
10.0
YA
Z
3
100.0 100.0
01
TEP172
)2
(c
4. Detailed description
ht
1. The starting point of the block following the corner chamfering is the virtual corner
ig
yr
intersection point.
op
3. When both, C_ and , R_ are commanded in the same block, the latter command is valid.
4. Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner
chamfering.
5. Program error occurs when the block following the block with corner chamfering does not
contain a linear interpolation command.
6. Program error occurs when the movement amount in the block commanding corner
chamfering is less than the chamfering amount.
12-66
Serial No. 269443
1. Funciton
The arbitrary corner is rounded with the arc whose radius is commanded by “,R_” and whose
center is on the bisecter of this corner angle.
2. Programming format
N100 G01 X_ Z_ ,R_;
.
Rounding is performed at the point where N100 and N200
d
N200 G01 X_ Z_;
ve
intersect.
s er
Arc radius of corner rounding
re
3. Example of program
ts
gh
(a) G01 W100.,R10.F100;
ri
ll
(b) U280.W100.;
.A
N
X-axis
O
TI
43
Corner rounding
A
(b)
R
94
ending point
PO
26
140
R
o.
Corner
N
rounding R10.0
al
intersection point
ZA
(a)
Se
A
IM
Z-axis
K
ZA
4. Detailed description
YA
1. The starting point of the block following the corner rounding is the virtual corner intersection
3
01
point.
)2
3. When both , C_ and , R_ are commanded in the same block the latter command is valid.
ig
4. Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner rounding.
yr
op
5. Program error occurs when the block following the block with corner rounding does not
C
12-67
Serial No. 269443
2. Programming format
N1 G01 Aa1 Zz1 (Xx1) Designate the angle and the coordinates of the X-axis or the Z-axis.
N2 G01 A–a2 Zz2 Xx2 (Setting Aa3 means the same as setting A–a2.)
d.
ve
er
X
s
re
(z1, x1)
x1
ts
–a2
gh
ri
N1 N2
ll
.A
a3
N
a1
x2
O
TI
(z2, x2)
43
Z
A
R
94
PO
MEP190
26
R
o.
O
N
3. Detailed description
C
al
1. The angle denotes that relative to the plus (+) direction of the first axis (horizontal axis) on
ri
ZA
Se
Assign the sign + for a counterclockwise direction (CCW) or the sign – for a clockwise
IM
direction (CW).
K
ZA
2. Set the ending point on one of the two axes of the selected plane.
A
3. Angle data will be ignored if the coordinates of both axes are set together with angles.
M
YA
4. If angles alone are set, the command will be handled as a geometric command.
3
5. For the second block, the angle at either the starting point or the ending point can be
01
specified.
)2
6. The linear angle command function does not work if address A is to be used for an axis
(c
ht
7. This function is valid only for the G01 command; it is not valid for other interpolation or
yr
positioning commands.
op
C
12-68
Serial No. 269443
!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!
.
d
ve
er
s
re
Macroprogram call-
out command
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
M30 M99
N
MEP164
O
TI
43
A
A macroprogram is a subprogram which is created using variables, calculation instructions,
R
94
These special control features (macroprograms) can be used by calling them from the main
R
o.
C
al
Detailed description
ri
ZA
Se
- When command G66 is entered, the designated user macro subprogram willbe called every
A
time after execution of the move commands within a block until G67 (cancellation) is entered.
IM
- Command codes G66 and G67 must reside in the same programm in pairs.
K
ZA
Note: In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of macro call in one block
A
M
together with any one for the following functions (described in this chapter):
YA
12-69
Serial No. 269443
1. Single call
O01
.
to subprogram
d
ve
er
G65P01Ll1 <argument>
s
re
M99
ts
gh
to main program
ri
ll
.A
N
O
The designated user macro subprogram ends with M99.
TI
Instruction G65 calls the designated user macro subprogram only once.
43
A
R
94
Format:
PO
26
O
N
Repeat times
al
K
ri
ZA
will be repeated.)
IM
Alternatively,
K
ZA
Repeat times
YA
<Argument>
ht
When argument is to be delivered to the user macro subprogram as a local variable, designate
ig
the required data with the respective addresses. (Argument designation is not available for a
yr
op
In such a case, the argument can have a sign and a decimal point, irrespective of the address.
Arguments can be specified using method I or II, as shown below.
12-70
Serial No. 269443
d.
- The relationship between addresses that can be specified using argument specification I, and
ve
er
variables numbers in a user macro unit, is shown in the following table:
s
re
Relationship between address and variables number Call commands and usable addresses
ts
Address specified using Variable in macro-
gh
G65, G66 G66.1
method I program
ri
A #1 # #
ll
.A
B #2 # #
N
C #3 # #
O
D #7 # #
TI
43
E #8 A # #
R
94
F #9 # #
PO
26
G #10 × ×*
R
o.
H #11 # #
O
N
I #4 # #
al
J #5 # #
ri
ZA
# #
Se
K #6
A
L #12 × ×*
IM
M #13 # #
K
N #14 × ×*
ZA
O #15 × ×
A
P #16 × ×*
M
YA
Q #17 # #
R #18 # #
3
01
S #19 # #
)2
T #20 # #
(c
U #21 # #
ht
V #22 # #
ig
W #23 # #
yr
X #24 # #
op
Y #25 # #
C
Z #26 # #
#: Usable ×: Unusable *: Usable in G66.1 modal
12-71
Serial No. 269443
B. Argument specification II
Format: A_B_C_I_J_K_I_J_K_!!!!!
Detailed description
- Up to a maximum of 10 sets of arguments that each consist of addresses I, J, and K, as well as
A, B, and C, can be specified.
- If identical addresses overlap, specify them in the required order.
- Addresses whose specification is not required can be omitted.
- The relationship between addresses that can be specified using argument specification II, and
variables numbers in a user macro unit, is shown in the following table:
d .
II addresses programs II addresses programs
ve
A #1 K5 #18
s er
B #2 I6 #19
re
C #3 J6 #20
ts
I1 #4 K6 #21
gh
J1 #5 I7 #22
ri
ll
K1 #6 J7 #23
.A
I2 #7 K7 #24
N
J2 #8 I8 #25
O
TI
K2 #9 J8 #26
43
I3 #10 A K8 #27
R
94
J3 #11 I9 #28
PO
26
K3 #12 J9 #29
R
o.
I4 #13 K9 #30
N
ZA
Se
J5 #17
K
Note: In the table above, the numerals 1 through 10 have been added to addresses I, J, and
ZA
J just to denote the order of arrangement of the designated sets of arguments: these
A
When both method I and method II are used to specify arguments, only the latter of two
)2
arguments which have an address corresponding to the same variable will become valid.
(c
Variables
yr
#1: 1.1
op
#2: –2.2
C
#3:
#4: 4.4
#5:
#6:
#7: 7.7
If two arguments (D3.3 and I7.7) are designated for the variable of #7, only the latter
argument (I7.7) will be used.
12-72
Serial No. 269443
Subprogram
Main program
O01
to subprogram
G66P01Ll1 <argument>
M99
to main program
.
G67
d
ve
to subprogram
s er
re
ts
For a block that has a move command code between G66 and G67, the designated user macro
gh
subprogram is executed after that move command has been executed. The subprogram is
ri
executed an l1 number of times for the first call, or once for subsequent calls.
ll
.A
For modal call of type A, the methods of specifying <argument> are the same as used for single
N
call.
O
TI
Format:
43
PO
26
Repeat times
R
o.
O
N
Program name
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Alternatively,
A
IM
Repeat times
A
M
Program No.
YA
3
Detailed description
01
)2
- When command G66 is entered, the designated user macro subprogram will be called every
(c
time after execution of the move commands within a block until command G67 (cancellation) is
ht
entered.
ig
yr
- Command codes G66 and G67 must reside in the same program in pairs.
op
Entry of a G67 command without a G66 command results in an alarm 857 INCORRECT USER
C
12-73
Serial No. 269443
Main program
N1G90G54G0X0Y0Z0
Subprogram
N2G91G00X–50.Y–50.Z–200.
N3G66P9010R–10.Z–30.F100 O9010
N4X–50.Y–50. To subprogram after execution of axis command N10G00Z#18M03
N5X–50. To subprogram after execution of axis command N20G09G01Z#26F#9
N6G67 N30G00Z–[#18+#26]
M M99
d .
To main program
ve
er
–150. –100. –50.
s
W
X
re
N2 N1
ts
N3
gh
N10 Argument R
N4 –50.
ri
N5
ll
–100. N20 N30
.A
Argument Z
N
Y
O
Argument F
TI
43
PO
MEP165
26
R
o.
Note 1: The designated subprogram is executed after the axis commands in the main program
N
K
ri
ZA
Note 2: No subprograms are executed for the G67 block and its successors.
Se
A
IM
The designated user macro subprogram is called unconditionally for each of the command
ZA
blocks present between G66.1 and G67. Execution of the macro program is repeated as
A
specified with L for the first call, and only once for each of subsequent calls.
M
YA
Format:
3
Repeat times
(c
ht
Program name
ig
yr
op
Alternatively,
C
Repeat times
Program No.
12-74
Serial No. 269443
d.
ve
Note: Call is executed even for the G66.1 command block of the G66.1 mode, with the
er
relationship between the addresses of the arguments and the variables numbers
s
re
being the same as for G65 (single call).
ts
- The data range of the G, L, P, and N commands that you can set as new variables using the
gh
G66.1 mode is the same as the data range of usual NC commands.
ri
ll
- Sequence number N, modal G-codes, and O are all updated as modal information.
.A
N
4. G-code macro call
O
TI
The user macro subprograms of the required program number can be called just by setting G-
43
codes.
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
Format:
O
N
G×× <argument>
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Detailed description
ZA
- The instruction shown above performs the same function as those of the instructions listed
A
M
below. Which of these listed instructions will apply is determined by the parameter data to be
YA
M98P∆∆∆∆
01
)2
G65P∆∆∆∆ <argument>
(c
G66P∆∆∆∆ <argument>
ht
ig
G66.1P∆∆∆∆ <argument>
yr
- Use parameters to set the relationship between G×× (macro call G-code) and P∆∆∆∆ (program
op
- Of G00 through G255, up to a maximum of 10 command codes can be used with this
instruction unless the uses of these codes are clearly predefined by EIA/ISO Standards, such
as G00, G01, G02, etc.
- The command code cannot be included in user macro subprograms that have been called
using G-codes.
12-75
Serial No. 269443
5. Auxiliary command macro call (M-, S-, T-, or B-code macro call)
The user macro subprograms of the required program number can be called just by setting M-,
S-, T-, or B-codes.
Format:
Mm (or Ss, Tt and Bb)
Detailed description (The following description also applies to S-, T-, and B-codes.)
d.
ve
- The instruction shown above performs the same function as those of the instructions listed
er
below. Which of these listed instructions will apply is determined by the parameter data to be
s
re
set for each M-code.
ts
gh
M98P∆∆∆∆
ri
G65P∆∆∆∆Mm
ll
.A
G66P∆∆∆∆Mm
N
G66.1P∆∆∆∆Mm
O
TI
- Use parameter to set the relationship between Mm (macro call M-code) and P∆∆∆∆ (program
43
PO
Up to a maximum of 10 M-codes, ranging from M00 to M95, can be registered. Do not register
26
the M-codes that are fundamentally required for your machine, nor M0, M1, M2, M30, and M96
R
o.
through M99.
N
C
al
- If registered auxiliary command codes are set in the user macro subprograms that have been
ri
ZA
called using M-codes, macro calls will not occur since those special auxiliary command codes
Se
- Arguments can be designated for G65, but cannot be designated for M98.
A
M
- Sequence numbers can be designated for M98, but cannot be designated for G65, G66, or
YA
G66.1.
3
- Command M98 executes a subprogram after M98 block commands other than M, P, H, and L
01
have been executed, whereas G65 just branches the program into a subprogram without doing
)2
anything.
(c
ht
- Single-block stop will occur if the block of command M98 has addresses other than O, N, P, H,
ig
- The level of local variables is fixed for M98, but for G65 does change according to the depth of
C
nesting. (For example, #1s, if present before and after M98, always mean the same, but if
present before and after G65, they have different meanings.)
- Command M98 can have up to a maximum of eight levels of call multiplexity when combined
with G65, G66, or G66.1, whereas the maximum available number of levels for command G65
is four when it is combined with G66 or G66.1.
12-76
Serial No. 269443
.
macro subprogram will be called even for the move commands in the macro each time
d
ve
axis movement is done.
er
Note 3: User macro subprograms are cancelled in a reverse order to that in which they have
s
re
been arranged.
ts
gh
Example:
ri
ll
User macroprogram operation
.A
Main program
Macro p1
N
G66Pp1
O
(p1 call-out)
TI
Zz1 x1 w1 x2 M99
43
After z1 execution
A
R
94
G66Pp2
PO
Macro p1
26
(p2 call-out)
o.
Zz2 x1 w1 x2 M99
N
After z2 execution
al
K
ri
ZA
G67
(p2 cancel)
Se
Macro p1
K
ZA
(p1 call-out)
Zz3 x1 w1 x2 M99
After z3 execution
A
M
G67
YA
(p1 cancel)
Zz4
3
01
Zz5
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-77
Serial No. 269443
d.
ve
M96<_>L_ (or M96P_L_) (Branching mode on)
er
M When user macroprogram interruption signal is input
s
M during this space, the branch into the specified user
re
macroprogram will be applied.
ts
M97 (Branching mode off)
gh
M
ri
ll
- User macro interrupts can be processed even when the number of levels of macro call
.A
multiplexity during the occurrence of an interrupt is four. The local variables' level of the user
N
macros used for interruption is the same as the level of the user macros existing during the
O
TI
occurrence of an interrupt.
43
A
R
94
PO
26
Interruption branch
R
Interruption return
o.
O
N
M
ri
ZA
M96P5100
Se
G1X
IM
Interruption G1Y
M
K
G65P2100 Interruption
ZA
M
A
M
M97
YA
M
M99 M99 M99
3
01
(Level 3) (Level 4)
)2
(c
ht
ig
12-78
Serial No. 269443
1. Multiplexing of variables
Under user macro specifications, variables can have their identifiers (identification numbers)
either transformed into variables, which is referred to as multiplexing, or replaced with
<expression>.
For <expression>, only one arithmetic expression (for either multiplication, division, addition, or
subtraction) can be used.
d.
Multiplexing variables
ve
Example 1:
er
#1=10 #10=20 #20=30 From #1 = 10, #[#[#1]] = #[#10] will result.
s
re
#5=#[#[#1]] From #10 = 20, #[#10] = #20 will result. Therefore #5 = #20, i.e. #5
ts
= 30 will result.
gh
#1=10 #10=20 #20=30 From #1 = 10, #[#[#1]] = #[#10] will result.
ri
#5=1000 From #10 = 20, #[#10] = #20 will result. Therefore #20 = #5, i.e.
ll
.A
#[#[#1]]=#5 #20 = 1000 will result.
N
Example 2: Replacing variables identifiers with <expression>
O
TI
#10=5
43
#[#10+1]=1000 A
#6 = 1000 will result.
R
94
PO
C
al
2. Undefined variables
ri
ZA
Se
Under user macro specifications, variables remaining unused after power-on or local variables
IM
that are not argument-specified by G65, G66, or G66.1 can be used as <empty>. Also, variables
K
Variable #0 is always used as <empty> one, and this variable cannot be defined on the left side
A
of the expression.
M
YA
A. Arithmetic expression
3
01
#1=#0................. #1 = <empty>
)2
#2=#0+1 ............ #2 = 1
(c
#3=1+#0 ............ #3 = 1
ht
ig
#4=#0∗10 .......... #4 = 0
yr
op
#5=#0+#0 .......... #5 = 0
C
Note: Be careful that <empty> is handled the same as 0 during processing of expressions.
<empty> + <empty> = 0
<empty> + <constant> = constant
<constant> + <empty> = constant
12-79
Serial No. 269443
B. Applying variables
Application of an undefined variable alone causes even the address to be ignored.
If #1 = <empty>
G0X#1Y1000 is equivalent to G0Y1000, and
G0X[#1+10]Y1000 is equivalent to G0X10Y1000.
C. Conditional expression
Only for EQ and NE, does <empty> differ from 0 in meaning.
.
d
#101EQ#0 <empty> = <empty> holds. #101EQ#0 0 = <empty> does not hold.
ve
<empty> ≠ 0 holds. 0 ≠ 0 does not hold.
er
#101NE0 #101NE0
s
#101GE#0 <empty> ≥ <empty> holds. #101GE#0 0 ≥ <empty> holds.
re
#101GT0 <empty> > 0 does not hold. #101GT0 0 > 0 does not hold.
ts
gh
Hold-conditions and not-hold-conditions list
ri
(For conditional expressions including undefined variables)
ll
.A
Right side EQ NE GT LT GE LE
N
O
Left side Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant
TI
43
Empty H H A H H H
R
94
Constant H H H
PO
26
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-80
Serial No. 269443
d .
up to a maximum of four levels of overlapping.
ve
er
G65Pp1Ll1 <argument>
s
re
where p1 : Program number
ts
gh
l1 : Number of repeat times
ri
<Argument> must be: Aa1 Bb1 Cc1 !!! Zz1.
ll
.A
The following represents the relationship between the address specified by <argument> and the
N
local variables number used in the user macro unit:
O
TI
43
G66.1 G66.1
26
G66 G66
R
# # # #
o.
A #1 R #18
O
N
# # B #2 # # S #19
al
# # C #3 # # T #20
ri
ZA
Se
# # D #7 # # U #21
A
# # # #
IM
E #8 V #22
# # F #9 # # W #23
K
ZA
× ×* G #10 # # X #24
# # # #
A
H #11 Y #25
M
# # I #4 # # Z #26
YA
# # J #5 – #27
3
# # K #6 – #28
01
)2
× ×* L #12 – #29
# #
(c
M #13 – #30
ht
× ×* N #14 – #31
ig
× × O #15 – #32
yr
× ×* P #16 – #33
op
# #
C
Q #17
Argument addresses marked as × in the table above cannot be used. Only during the G66.1
mode, however, can argument addresses marked with an asterisk (*) in this table be additionally
used. Also, the dash sign (–) indicates that no address is crosskeyed to the local variables
number.
12-81
Serial No. 269443
1. Local variables for a subprogram can be defined by specifying <argument> when calling a
macro.
To subprogram #5=#4010
G65P9900A60.S100.F800 G91G01 X[#19∗COS[#1]]
Y[#19∗SIN[#1]]F#9
M02 M99
.
Local variable setting by argument
d
ve
F (#9)=800
er
Local variable
s
data table S (#19)=100.000
re
ts
gh
2. Within a subprogram, local variables can be freely used.
ri
ll
.A
N
Main program Subprogram (O1)
O
TI
#30=FUP[#2/#5/2]
43
To subprogram
A #5=#2/#30/2
R
94
M98H100L#30
PO
G65P1A100.B50.J10.F500
26
X#1
R
M99
o.
O
N
N100G1X#1F#9
C
al
Y#5
K
ri
ZA
X–#1
Se
M99
K
be changed in the
Local variable set by argument
subprogram
A
B
M
YA
A (#1) 100.000
B (#2) 50.000
J
3
F (#9) 500
01
Local variable
J (#5) 10.000 → 8.333
data table
A → 3.
)2
(#30)
(c
ht
ig
yr
In the sample program for face-milling that is shown above, although the argument J has initially
op
C
been programmed as a machining pitch of 10 mm, it has been changed into 8.333 mm to ensure
equal-pitched machining.
Also, local variable #30 contains the calculated data about the number of times of reciprocal
machining.
12-82
Serial No. 269443
Main (Level 0) O1 (Macro level 1) O10 (Macro level 2) O100 (Macro level 3)
#1=0.1#2=0.2#3=0.3
d .
ve
er
s
re
Local variable (0) Local variable (1) Local variable (2) Local variable (3)
ts
#1 0.100 A(#1) 1.000 A(#1) 10.000 A(#1) 100.000
gh
#2 0.200 B(#2) 2.000 B(#2) 20.000 B(#2) 200.000
ri
#3 0.300 C(#3) 3.000 C(#3) 30.000 C(#3)
ll
D(#7) D(#7)
.A
N
Z(#26) Z(#26) Z(#26)
O
TI
#33 #33 #33 #33
43
A
R
94
PO
26
How the local variables are currently being used is displayed on the screen.
R
o.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-83
Serial No. 269443
System variable Points Interface input signal System variable Points Interface input signal
#1000 1 Register R72, bit 0 #1016 1 Register R73, bit 0
#1001 1 Register R72, bit 1 #1017 1 Register R73, bit 1
d .
#1002 1 Register R72, bit 2 #1018 1 Register R73, bit 2
ve
#1003 1 Register R72, bit 3 #1019 1 Register R73, bit 3
s er
#1004 1 Register R72, bit 4 #1020 1 Register R73, bit 4
re
#1005 1 Register R72, bit 5 #1021 1 Register R73, bit 5
ts
gh
#1006 1 Register R72, bit 6 #1022 1 Register R73, bit 6
ri
#1007 1 Register R72, bit 7 #1023 1 Register R73, bit 7
ll
#1008 1 Register R72, bit 8 #1024 1 Register R73, bit 8
.A
#1009 1 Register R72, bit 9 #1025 1 Register R73, bit 9
N
O
#1010 1 Register R72, bit 10 #1026 1 Register R73, bit 10
TI
#1011 1 Register R72, bit 11 #1027 1 Register R73, bit 11
43
A
R
94
O
N
K
ri
ZA
Note: The following interface input signals are used exclusively in the NC system operation
(cannot be used for other purposes).
3
01
12-84
Serial No. 269443
System variable Points Interface output signal System variable Points Interface output signal
#1100 1 Register R172, bit 0 #1116 1 Register R173, bit 0
#1101 1 Register R172, bit 1 #1117 1 Register R173, bit 1
d .
#1102 1 Register R172, bit 2 #1118 1 Register R173, bit 2
ve
#1103 1 Register R172, bit 3 #1119 1 Register R173, bit 3
s er
#1104 1 Register R172, bit 4 #1120 1 Register R173, bit 4
re
#1105 1 Register R172, bit 5 #1121 1 Register R173, bit 5
ts
gh
#1106 1 Register R172, bit 6 #1122 1 Register R173, bit 6
ri
#1107 1 Register R172, bit 7 #1123 1 Register R173, bit 7
ll
#1108 1 Register R172, bit 8 #1124 1 Register R173, bit 8
.A
#1109 1 Register R172, bit 9 #1125 1 Register R173, bit 9
N
O
#1110 1 Register R172, bit 10 #1126 1 Register R173, bit 10
TI
#1111 1 Register R172, bit 11 #1127 1 Register R173, bit 11
43
A
R
94
O
N
K
ri
ZA
Se
Note 1: Data of the system variables from #1100 to #1135 is saved according to the logical
level (1 or 0) of the signal that has been lastly sent. The saved data is cleared by
3
01
power-on/off automatically.
)2
Note 2: The following applies if a data other than 1 or 0 is assigned to the variables from #1100
(c
to #1131:
ht
ig
12-85
Serial No. 269443
#1001 #1101
#1002 #1102
Read Read
#1003 #1103
only and write
#1028 #1128
d .
#1129
ve
#1029
er
Macro- #1130
#1030
s
instruction
re
#1031 #1131
ts
gh
32 bit (R74, R75) (R174, R175) 32 bit
ri
#1033 #1133
ll
(R76, R77) (R176, R177)
.A
#1034 #1134
N
(R78, R79) (R178, R179)
O
#1035 #1135
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
5. Tool offset
N
C
al
ZA
# : Available
Se
× : Unavailable
A
#160001 - #16001 -
YA
#120000+n) #12000+n)
01
#170001 - #17001 -
)2
#130000+n) #13000+n)
ig
#120001 - #12001 -
× × # Geom. offset X # Length X
yr
#120000+n #12000+n
op
#130001 - #13001 -
× × # Wear comp. X
C
#130000+n #13000+n
#140001 - #14001 -
× × # Geom. offset Y # Length Y
#140000+n #14000+n
#150001 - #15001 -
× × # Wear comp. Y
#150000+n #15000+n
#180001 - #18001 - # Offsetting # Offsetting
× ×
#180000+n #18000+n direction direction
12-86
Serial No. 269443
*: The numbers of variables used for tool offset depend upon a parameter:
F96 bit 0 = 0: #16001 to #16000+n, and #17001 to #17000+n
= 1: #12001 to #12000+n, and #13001 to #13000+n.
Note: Set bit 0 of parameter F96 to “0” to use the TOOL OFFSET type C data.
Using variables numbers, you can read tool data or assign data.
Usable variables numbers are of the order of either #10000 or #2000. For the order of #2000,
.d
however, only up to 200 sets of tool offsets can be used.
ve
The last three digits of a variables number denote a tool offset number.
ser
As with other variables, tool offset data is to contain the decimal point. The decimal point must
re
therefore be included if you want to set data that has decimal digits.
ts
gh
ri
ll
Common variables Tool offset data
.A
Program example After
execution
N
#101=1000 #101=1000.0
O
#10001=#101
H1=1000.000
TI
#102=#10001
43
#102=1000.0
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
#1=#5003
G00
ZA
Sensor
)2
(c
ht
ig
Note: The example shown above does not allow for any skip sensor signal delay. Also,
yr
#5003 denotes the position of the starting point of the Z-axis, and #5063 denotes the
op
skip coordinate of the Z-axis, that is, the position at which a skip signal was input during
C
execution of G31.
12-87
Serial No. 269443
.
G56 #5261 #5262 #5263 #5276
d
A workpiece coordinate system offset
ve
G57 #5281 #5282 #5283 #5296 feature is required.
er
G58 #5301 #5302 #5303 #5316
s
re
G59 #5321 #5322 #5323 #5336
ts
gh
ri
(Example 1) N1
ll
.A
M
N1 G28X0Y0Z0 –90.
N
N2 #5221=–20.#5222=–20.
N3
O
N3 G90G00G54X0Y0 –10.
TI
43
W1 N11 –20.
A W1
R
94
Workpiece coordinate
PO
N10 #5221=–90.#5222=–10.
26
by N10
o.
O
N
G54 specified by N2
al
M02
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
(Example 2)
Fundamental machine coordinate system
ZA
Coordinate shift
A
M
M
Coordinate
system G55
YA
before G54
change
W2 (G55)
3
W1 (G54)
01
N100 #5221=#5221+#5201
)2
#5222=#5222+#5202
(c
#5241=#5241+#5201
#5242=#5242+#5202
ht
Coordinate M
G55
op
W2 (G55)
W1 (G54)
MEP166
The example 2 shown above applies only when coordinate shift data is to be added to the offset
data of a workpiece coordinate system (G54 or G55) without changing the position of the
workpiece coordinate system.
12-88
Serial No. 269443
.
the optional function
d
ve
for additional coordi-
G54.1P299 #75961 #75962 #75963 #75964 #75976
er
nate system offset.
s
G54.1P300 #75981 #75982 #75983 #75984 #75996
re
ts
Alternatively, variables numbered 7001 to 7956 can be used to read or assign additional work-
gh
piece coordinate system offsetting dimensions. The variable number for the k-th axis origin of the
ri
“Pn” coordinate system can be calculated as follows:
ll
.A
7000 + (n – 1) × 20 + k
N
O
Note: The total number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications.
TI
43
Remarks
axis axis axis axis axis
PO
Data name
26
ZA
As shown below, there are variable numbers provided for reading the local offsetting values on
M
12-89
Serial No. 269443
9. NC alarm (#3000)
d .
ve
The NC unit can be forced into an alarm status using variables number 3000.
er
s
re
#3000 = 70 (CALL#PROGRAMMER#TEL#530)
ts
gh
Alarm No. Alarm message
ri
ll
.A
The setting range for the alarm No. is from 1 to 6999.
N
O
The maximum available length of the alarm message is 31 characters.
TI
43
Note: The type of alarm message displayed on the screen depends on the designated alarm
A
R
94
O
N
1 to 20 [Designated alarm No.] + 979 Message preset for the displayed alarm No. *1
C
al
ZA
Se
*1 Refers to alarm Nos. 980 to 999 whose messages are preset as indicated in Alarm List.
A
IM
condition of #1=0)
YA
M
3
Operation stop by
#3000=1
)2
NC alarm
N100!!!!!!!!!!!!
(c
M
ht
ig
yr
op
“3021#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1” on condition
of #2=0)
M
IF[#2NE0]GOTO200 Operation stop
3021#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1
#3000=21(#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1) by NC alarm
N200!!!!!!!!!!
M
12-90
Serial No. 269443
The integrated time is cleared to 0 after having reached about 2.44 × 1011 ms (about 7.7 years).
d .
O9010
ve
To subprogram #3001=0
ser
WHILE[#3001LE#20]DO1
re
G65P9010T (Allowable time [ms])
ts
gh
END1
ri
M99
ll
.A
Local variable Execution of blocks from DO1 to END1
N
O
is repeated until the allowable time has
T#20______
TI
elapsed, and then the control jumps to
Into local variable #20
43
PO
26
O
N
Assigning one of the values listed in the table below to variables number 3003 allows single-
al
block stop to be made invalid at subsequent blocks or the program to be advanced to the next
ri
ZA
Se
block without ever having to wait for the arrival of an auxiliary-function code (M, S, T, or B)
A
IM
0 Effective Wait
A
M
1 Ineffective Wait
YA
2 Effective No wait
3 Ineffective No wait
3
01
12-91
Serial No. 269443
.
d
5 Ineffective Effective Ineffective
ve
er
6 Effective Ineffective Ineffective
s
7 Ineffective Ineffective Ineffective
re
ts
Note 1: Variable #3004 is cleared to 0 by resetting.
gh
ri
Note 2: Each of the listed bits makes the function valid if 0, or invalid if 1.
ll
.A
13. Program stop (#3006)
N
O
Use of variables number 3006 allows the program to be stopped after execution of the
TI
immediately preceding block.
43
A
R
94
Format:
PO
26
O
N
K
ri
ZA
Additional setting of a character string (in 29 characters at maximum) in parentheses allows the
Se
The mirror image status of each axis at one particular time can be checked by reading variables
A
number 3007.
M
YA
Variable #3007 has its each bit crosskeyed to an axis, and these bits indicate that:
If 0, the mirror image is invalid.
3
01
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(c
Axis no. 6 5 4 3 2 1
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-92
Serial No. 269443
. d
#4004 #4204 Pre-move stroke check G22 : 22, G23 : 23
ve
#4005 #4205 Feed specification G98 : 98, G99 : 99
s er
#4006 #4206 Inch/metric selection G20/21 : 20/21
re
#4007 #4207 Tool radius compensation G40 : 40, G41 : 41, G42 : 42
ts
gh
#4008 #4208 Tool length offset G43.4 : 43.4, G43.5 : 43.5
ri
#4009 #4209 Fixed cycle G80 : 80, G73/74 : 73/74, G76 : 76, G83-G89 : 83-89
ll
#4010 #4210
.A
#4011 #4211
N
#4012 #4212
O
Workpiece coordinate system G54-G59 : 54-59, G54.1 : 54.1
TI
#4013 #4213 Mode of machining (feed) G61-64 : 61-64, G61.1 : 61.1, G61.4 : 61.4
43
PO
26
#4015 #4215
R
O
N
#4018 #4218
ri
ZA
#4019 #4219
Se
#4020 #4220 Cross machining control G110 : 110, G110.1 : 110.1, G111 : 111
IM
#4021 #4221
K
#4022 #4222
ZA
#4025 #4225
#4026 #4226 Polar coordinate interpolation ON/OFF G12.1/13.1 : 12.1/13.1
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-93
Serial No. 269443
d .
#4103 #4303 #4114 #4314 Sequence No.!!!N
ve
#4104 #4304 #4115 #4315 Program No.!!!O
s er
#4105 #4305 #4116 #4316
re
#4106 #4306 #4117 #4317
ts
#4107 #4307 Tool radius comp. No !!!D #4118 #4318
gh
#4108 #4308 #4119 #4319 Spindle function!!!S
ri
ll
#4109 #4309 Rate of feed!!!F #4120 #4320 Tool function!!!T
.A
#4110 #4310 Addt. workpiece coordinate system
N
#4130 #4330 G54-G59: 0,
O
#4111 #4311 Tool length offset No.!!!H G54.1P1-P300: 1-300
TI
43
A
Note 1: Use the variable #4315 from the second block of the program. If it is used in the first
R
94
PO
R
o.
Note 2: The variables #4115 and #4315 are only effective for programs whose ID-number or
O
N
name consists of numerals only. During execution of a program whose name contains
al
even one single character other than numerals, the reading in question remains zero
ri
ZA
Se
(0).
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-94
Serial No. 269443
.
3 #5003 #5023 #5043 #5063 #5083 #5103
d
ve
er
16 #5016 #5036 #5056 #5076 #5096 #5116
s
re
Remarks
Possible Impossible Impossible Possible Impossible Possible
ts
(Reading during move)
gh
ri
Note: The number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications.
ll
.A
1. The ending-point coordinates and skip coordinates read will be those related to the
N
workpiece coordinate system.
O
TI
2. Ending-point coordinates, skip coordinates, and servo deviations can be checked even
43
A
during movement. Machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates, and tool position offset
R
94
R
o.
O
N
K
ri
W
Se
A
IM
G00
K
ZA
G01
A
M
YA
3
01
Read
)2
command
End point
(c
coordinates
ht
ig
yr
W Workpiece
op
coordinate system
C
Workpiece
coordinates
Machine
coordinate system
Machine M
coordinates
MEP167
12-95
Serial No. 269443
3. Skip coordinates denote the position at which a skip signal has turned on at the block of
G31. If the skip signal has not turned on, skip coordinates will denote the corresponding
ending-point position.
Read
command
.
d
ve
er
Skip coordinate value
s
re
Gauge, etc.
ts
MEP168
gh
ri
4. The ending-point position denotes the tool tip position which does not allow for any tool
ll
offsets, whereas machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates, and skip coordinates denote
.A
the tool reference-point position which allows for tool offsets.
N
O
TI
43
Skip signal A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
F (Speed)
N
W
Workpiece
al
coordinate system
ri
ZA
Workpiece
Se
coordinates Machine
IM
M coordinate system
K
Machine coordinates
ZA
MEP169
YA
The input coordinates of a skip signal denote the position within the workpiece coordinate
3
system. The coordinates stored in variables from #5061 to #5066 are those existing when
01
)2
skip signals were input during movement of the machine. These coordinates can therefore
(c
be read at any time after that. See Chapter 14 for further details.
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-96
Serial No. 269443
.
N7 #103=SQR[#101?#101+#102?#102]
d
ve
N8 G91G01Z–#26
er
N9 IF[#180EQ91]GOTO11
s
N10 G90
re
(Common variable)
N11 M99
ts
Skip signal input
#101 87.245
gh
Start point #102 87.245
ri
N4 #103 123.383
ll
Z N3 #102
.A
N8 #103
N5
N
Y
#101
O
X
TI
43
A
R
94
O
N
ZA
#5062 Y-axis skip input point N7 Measuring line linear amount calculation
A
IM
N8 Z-axis escape
N9, N10 Modal return of G90/G91
K
ZA
N1 G91G28X0Y0
(c
N2 G90G00X0Y0
ht
–50
N3 X0Y–100.
ig
yr
N4 G31X–150.Y–50.F80 –75
op
N5 #111=#5061 #112=#5062
C
N6 G00Y0 –100
N7 G31X0
N8 #121=#5061 #122=#5062
N9 M02 –Y
Skip signal
MEP171
12-97
Serial No. 269443
d.
ve
#5503 Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (X-component) L3
er
#5504 Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (Y-component) L4
s
re
#58165 Retry frequency for workpiece measurement K23 R8164, 8165
ts
#58167 Rate of skip feed for measurement K13 R8166, 8167
gh
#58169 Rate of approach feed for measurement K14 R8168, 8169
ri
#58171 Measurement stroke for workpiece measurement K19 R8170, 8171
ll
#58172 Safety contour clearance – Outside diameter (Radius value) TC37 R8172
.A
#58173 Safety contour clearance – Inside diameter (Radius value) TC38 R8173
N
O
#58174 Safety contour clearance – Front face TC39 R8174
TI
#58175 Safety contour clearance – Back face TC40 R8175
43
#58205
A
Measurement stroke for tool nose measurement K20
R
94
PO
#58221 Width of the tool-nose measurement sensor along the X-axis L22
26
#58223 Width of the tool-nose measurement sensor along the Z-axis L23
o.
O
N
ZA
#58259 Z-axis escape distance from the approach point after TOOL EYE L28
IM
measurement
K
ZA
19. Tool No. (#51999) and data line No. (#3020) of the spindle tool
A
Using variables numbers 51999 and 3020, you can check the tool number and TOOL DATA line
M
YA
Note 2: During tool path checking operation both variables (#51999 and #3020) store data with
op
mere reference to the “TNo.” programmed in a T-code and, therefore, remain zero (0)
C
12-98
Serial No. 269443
d.
#62001 to #62000+n #620001 to #620000+n Tool life flag
ve
#63001 to #63000+n #630001 to #630000+n Tool damage flag
s er
#64001 to #64000+n #640001 to #640000+n Wear compensation X
re
#65001 to #65000+n #650001 to #650000+n Wear compensation Y
ts
gh
#66001 to #66000+n #660001 to #660000+n Wear compensation Z
ri
#67001 to #67000+n #670001 to #670000+n Group number
ll
#68001 to #68000+n #680001 to #680000+n Length B (turning)
.A
Length A and Length B are calculated as follows:
N
O
Length A = Z-axis value in parameter S23 – TOOL SET Z
TI
43
Note 1: During tool path check, tool data can be checked but cannot be assigned.
PO
26
Note 2: Tool life flags (variables from #62001/#620001) and tool damage flags (variables from
o.
O
N
#63001/#630001) can take either 1 or 0 as their logical states (1 for ON, 0 for OFF).
C
al
K
ri
Using variables tabulated below, EIA/ISO tool data (tool life management data) can be read or
IM
written, as required.
K
Note 1: During tool path check, tool data can be checked but cannot be assigned.
Note 2: Tool life flags (variables from #42001/#420001) and tool damage flags (variables from
#43001/#430001) can take either 1 or 0 as their logical states (1 for ON, 0 for OFF).
12-99
Serial No. 269443
The date stored in #3011 consists of 8 digits (4, 2, and 2 digits denote respectively year, month,
and day), and the time in #3012 is composed of three sets of two-digit data (for hour, minute, and
second in that order).
Example: If the date is December 15, 2006 and the time is 16:45:10, data is set as follows in
d.
ve
the corresponding system variables:
er
#3011 = 20061215
s
re
#3012 = 164510.
ts
gh
23. Total number of machined parts and the number of parts required
ri
Variables numbered 3901 and 3902 can be used to read or assign the total number of machined
ll
.A
parts and the number of parts required.
N
Variable Nos. Description
O
TI
#3901 Total number of machined parts
43
PO
26
Note 2: Data reading and writing by these variables is surely suppressed during tool path
N
C
al
checking.
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-100
Serial No. 269443
Format:
SETVNn [NAME1, NAME2, .....]
.d
Name of #n + 1 (Varaibles name)
ve
s er
Each variables name must be separated using the comma (,).
re
Detailed description
ts
gh
- Once a variables name has been set, it remains valid even after power-off.
ri
- Variables in a program can be called using the variables names. The variable to be called must,
ll
.A
however, be enclosed in brackets ([ ]).
N
Example: G01X[#POINT1]
O
[#TIMES]=25
TI
43
A
- Variables names can be checked on the USER PARAMETER No. 1 display. The names
R
94
On the display
N
C
al
F46 0
K
ri
←
ZA
12-101
Serial No. 269443
.
#3023 Data line number of the specified tool (for reading only).
d
ve
Use this variable to read out the data line number of the tool specified by the
er
variable #3022.
s
The reading in #3023 is zero (0) if there is no corresponding tool registered in
re
the memory.
ts
gh
Example:
ri
TNo. #3022 setting Reading in #3023
ll
.A
1 A 1.01 1
N
1 B 1.02 2
O
TI
1 C 1.03 3
43
2 A 2.61 A 4
R
94
PO
2 B 2.62 5
26
2 C 2.63 6
R
o.
3 H 3.08 7
N
C
al
3 V 3.22 8
K
ri
ZA
3 Z 3.26 9
Se
M M M M
IM
M M M M
K
Failure – 0
ZA
A
Variable numbered 3094 can be used to secure information about the type and combination of
system unit and input unit (inch or metric).
3
01
12-102
Serial No. 269443
. d
ve
#3102 value Basic data for tool life management
er
1 Number of workpieces machined with the tool
s
re
2 Application time of the tool
ts
4 X-axis wear compensation amount
gh
8 Y-axis wear compensation amount
ri
16 Z-axis wear compensation amount
ll
.A
Variable #3102 can take a value of the sum of multiple values enumerated above when the tool
N
O
life management is currently done on the basis of the respective data types.
TI
43
A
31. Contents of the S12 or S23 parameters (#3200 and #3212 or #3223)
R
94
PO
26
Variables numbered 3200, 3210 and 3223 can be used to read the settings of particular S
R
O
N
K
ri
65 to 90 Decimal notation of the ASCII code of axis name within the current system
A
IM
Example 1: #3200 = 0;
K
Designation of the first significant axis setting (normally: X) within the system.
ZA
A
#3212 S12
)2
#3223 S23
(c
ht
Note 2: It is not necessary to repeat writing into #3200 next time the reading with #3212 or
yr
12-103
Serial No. 269443
.
#9101 Current Z-offset value
d
ve
#9102 Current C-offset value
ser
re
33. Positional information for the powered tailstock
ts
gh
Variables numbered 56154 and 56156 can be used to assign the particular positions as required
ri
for moving a powered tailstock.
ll
.A
Variable Nos. Description
N
#56154 Tailstock position 1
O
#56156 Tailstock position 2
TI
43
A
Note 1: The setting range is from –9999.999 to 0 for metric data input, or from –999.9999 to 0
R
94
PO
Note 2: “Position 1” and “Position 2” are the respective positions, to which the tailstock can be
o.
O
N
K
ri
ZA
Variable numbered 3024 can be used to set the amount of a workpiece transfer operation which
IM
is performed within an EIA/ISO program. The block of setting the variable #3024 does not cause
K
any axis motion on the machine, but informs the NC unit of the workpiece being transferred so
ZA
that a tool path avoiding collision with the shifted workpiece can be drawn timely for the suc-
A
M
ceeding process by a MAZATROL program on the side of the turning spindle No. 2.
YA
<Example of programming>
3
MAZATROL program
01
)2
Machining on the
M
ig
G90G1W-1200.4 (Transfer)
op
Machining on the
M99
turning spindle No. 2
END unit
Note: For a restart operation, based on a MAZATROL program of the above structure, from a
block of machining on the side of the turning spindle No. 2, enter a block of “#3024 =
1200.4” in the MDI mode before starting the operation.
12-104
Serial No. 269443
.
#
d
#58071 TARGET DATA Y
ve
#58073 TARGET DATA Z # #
er
#58075 MEASURED DATA X #
s
re
#58077 MEASURED DATA Y #
ts
#58079 MEASURED DATA Z # #
gh
#58080 MEASURE POINT #1 (Axis name in ASCII code) # #
ri
#58081 MEASURE POINT #2 (Axis name in ASCII code) # #
ll
.A
#58083 MEASURE POINT #1 (Position) # #
#
N
#58085 MEASURE POINT #2 (Position) #
O
#58087 OFFSET AMOUNT X #
TI
#
43
O
N
#
C
ZA
Se
Use the following variables to read and write 2-byte data of register R:
K
ZA
Example 1: Use the variable numbered 500100 for the R100 register.
YA
Use the following variables to read and write 4-byte data of register R:
3
01
Example 2: Use the variable numbered 560100 for the R10100/R10101 register.
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-105
Serial No. 269443
[1] Definition/replacement of
#i=#j Definition/replacement
variables
[2] Additional-type operations #i=#j+#k Addition
#i=#j–#k Subtraction
.
#i=#jOR#k Logical additon (For each of 32 bits)
d
ve
#i=#jXOR#k Exclusive OR (For each of 32 bits)
er
[3] Multiplicative-type #i=#j∗#k Multiplication
s
operations #i=#j/#k Division
re
#i=#jMOD#k Surplus
ts
#i=#jAND#k Logical product (For each of 32 bits)
gh
[4] Functions #i=SIN[#k] Sine
ri
#i=COS[#k] Cosine
ll
#i=TAN[#k] Tangent (tanq is used as sinq/cosq.)
.A
#i=ATAN[#j] Arc-tangent (Either ATAN or ATN can be used.)
N
#i=ACOS[#j] Arc-cosine
O
#i=SQRT[#k] Square root (Either SQRT or SQR is available.)
TI
43
PO
RND is available.)
O
N
Natural logarithm
ZA
#i=LN[#k]
Se
Note 1: In principle, data without a decimal point is handled as data that has a decimal point.
(Example: 1 = 1.000)
K
ZA
Note 2: Offsets from variable #10001, workpiece coordinate system offsets from variable
A
#5201, and other data become data that has a decimal point. If data without a decimal
M
point is defined using these variables numbers, therefore, a decimal point will also be
YA
Example:
)2
Common variable
(c
ht
#101=1000
#101 1000
ig
#10001=#101 Execution
yr
#102 1.000
#102=#10001
op
C
12-106
Serial No. 269443
d.
([ ]). Up to five sets of brackets, including those of functions, can be used for one expression.
ve
er
#101=SQRT[[[#111–#112]∗SIN[#113]+#114]∗#15]
s
re
One fold
ts
Two fold
gh
ri
Three fold
ll
.A
3. Examples of operation instructions
N
O
[1] Main program and G65 P100 A10 B20. #1 10.000
TI
argument #101=100.000 #2 20.000
43
#102 200.000
PO
26
= #3=#101 #3 100.000
C
#4=#102 #4 200.000
K
ri
OR #4=#3OR14 14 = 00001110
M
#4 = 01101110 = 110
YA
#4 = 01101010 = 106
)2
12-107
Serial No. 269443
.
[11] Tangent #551=TAN[60] #551 1.732
d
ve
TAN #552=TAN[60.] #552 1.732
#553=1000∗TAN[60]
er
#553 1732.051
#554=1000∗TAN[60.] #554 1732.051
s
re
#555=1000.∗TAN[60] #555 1732.051
#556=1000.∗TAN[60.]
ts
#556 1732.051
gh
Note: TAN[60] is equal to TAN[60.].
ri
[12]Arc-tangent #561=ATAN[173205/1000000] #561 60.000
ll
ATAN #562=ATAN[173.205/100.] #562 60.000
.A
#563=ATAN[1.732] #563 59.999
N
[13]Arc-cosine #521=ACOS[100000/141421] #521 45.000
O
ACOS #522=ACOS[100./141.421] #522 45.000
TI
43
PO
#573=SQRT[10.∗10.+20.∗20.]
C
#573 22.361
al
#574=SQRT[#14∗#14+#15∗#15]
K
#574 190.444
ri
ZA
#3=70.
#4=–50.
A
#25=ROUND[–14/3] #25 –5
yr
#26=ROUND[–14./3] #26 –5
op
#27=ROUND[–14/3.] #27 –5
C
#28=ROUND[–14./3.] #28 –5
[18]Cutting away any #21=FIX[14/3] #21 4.000
decimal digits #22=FIX[14./3] #22 4.000
FIX #23=FIX[14/3.] #23 4.000
#24=FIX[14./3.] #24 4.000
#25=FIX[–14/3] #25 –4.000
#26=FIX[–14./3] #26 –4.000
#27=FIX[–14/3.] #27 –4.000
#28=FIX[–14./3.] #28 –4.000
12-108
Serial No. 269443
.
#106=EXP[–2]
d
ve
er
4. Operation accuracy
s
re
The errors listed in the table below are generated by one arithmetic operation, and the error rate
ts
increases each time an operation is performed.
gh
ri
Operation format Mean error Max. error Kind of error
ll
a=b+c ε ε
.A
2.33 × 10–10 5.32 × 10–10 Min. ,
a=b–c c b
N
a=b•c
O
1.55 × 10–10 4.66 × 10–10
ε
TI
a = b/c 4.66 × 10–10 1.86 × 10–9 Relative error
43
A a
b 1.24 × 10–9 3.73 × 10–9
R
94
a=
PO
26
a = sin b
5.0 × 10–9 1.0 × 10–8
ε degree
R
O
N
–1 –6 –6
a = tan b/c 1.8 × 10 3.6 × 10
C
al
K
ri
A. Addition/subtraction
ZA
As for additional-type operations, if an absolute value is subtracted from the other, the relative
A
M
For example, when the true values (such values, by the way, cannot be substitued directly) of
3
#10 = 2345678988888.888
(c
#20 = 2345678901234.567
ht
then #10 – #20 = 87654.321 would not result from calculation of #10 – #20. This is because,
ig
since the effective number of digits of the variable is eight (decimal), the approximate values of
yr
op
#10 = 2345679000000.000
#20 = 2345678900000.000
More strictly, internal binary values slightly differ from these values. Actually therefore, a
significant error results as follows:
#10 – #20 = 100000.000.
12-109
Serial No. 269443
B. Logical relationship
As for EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE, the processing is executed in a similar manner to addition
and substraction, so be careful to errors. For example, to judge whether #10 is equal to #20 of
the above example, the conditional expression
IF [#10EQ#20]
is not appropriate due to the errors. In such a case, therefore, give a macro-instruction as shown
below to allow for an acceptable tolerance in the judgement on the equality of two values.
IF [ABS[#10 – #20] LT200000]
C. Trigonometric functions
d.
For trigonometric functions, although the absolute error is guaranteed, the relative error is not
ve
below 10–8. Be careful, therefore, when carrying out multiplication, or division after trigonometric
ser
function operations.
re
ts
12-10-6 Control commands
gh
ri
The flow of a program can be controlled using IF ∼ GOTO ∼ and WHILE DO ∼ commands.
ll
.A
1. Branching
N
O
Format: IF [conditional expression] GOTO n
TI
43
The branching will occur to the block headed by sequence number ‘n’ if the condition holds, or if
PO
26
the condition does not hold, the next block will be executed.
R
o.
K
ri
ZA
A
IM
#i EQ #j = ( #i is equal to #j.)
≠ (#i is not equal to #j.)
K
#I NE #j
ZA
For GOTO n, n must be a sequence number within the same program. If the sequence number
)2
does not exist in that program, an alarm 843 DESIGNATED SNo. NOT FOUND will occur. An
(c
Sequence number designation Nn must be set at the beginning of the destination block.
ig
Otherwise, an alarm 843 DESIGNATED SNo. NOT FOUND will result. If, however, the block
yr
op
begins with “/” and Nn follows, the program can be branched into that sequence number.
C
12-110
Serial No. 269443
.
head
d
ve
s er
re
ts
Note: During search for the branching destination sequence number, if the area from the
gh
block after “IF ...” to the program end (% code) is searched (forward search) in vain,
ri
then the area from the head down to the block before “IF ...” will be searched next
ll
(backward search). It will therefore take more time to execute backward search
.A
(searching in the opposite direction to the flow of the program) than to execute forward
N
O
search.
TI
43
2. Looping A
R
94
PO
26
Format:
R
o.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
ENDm
Se
A
IM
The area from the next block to the ENDm block loops while the conditional expression holds. If
K
the conditional expression does not hold, control will be tansferred to the block after ENDm. In
ZA
You must always use WHILE [conditional expression] DOm and ENDm in pairs. If you omit
M
YA
WHILE [conditional expression], the area from DOm to ENDm will endlessly loop. In DOm, m (1
to 127) identifies the number of looping. (DO1, DO2, DO3, and so on up to DO127)
3
01
12-111
Serial No. 269443
[1] Same identifying No. can be used repeatedly. [2] The identifying No. of WHILE ∼ DOm is arbitrary.
END1
Usable
END3
Usable
WHILE ∼ DO1 WHILE ∼ DO2
.
END2
d
Usable
ve
er
END1 WHILE ∼ DO1
s
re
END1
ts
gh
[3] Up to 27 levels of WHILE ∼ DOm can be used. [4] The total number of levels of WHILE ∼ DOm must not
ri
ll
m can be 1 to 127, independent of the depth of nesting. exceed 27.
.A
WHILE ∼ DO1
WHILE ∼ DO1 DO1
N
WHILE ∼ DO2
O
TI
WHILE ∼ DO2 DO2 M
WHILE ∼ DO27
43
% A
M %
R
94
%
WHILE ∼ DO27 WHILE ∼ DO28
PO
DO27
26
Usable
Unusable
R
END27 END28
o.
O
N
M END27
al
END2
K
M
ri
ZA
END2
Se
END1
A
END1
IM
[5] WHILE ∼ DOm must precede ENDm. [6] WHILE ∼ DOm must correspond to ENDm one-to-one in the
ZA
same program.
A
WHILE ∼ DO1
M
END1
YA
WHILE ∼ DO1
3
Unusable
01
Unusable
)2
[7] WHILE ∼ DOm must not overlap. [8] Outward branching from the range of WHILE ∼ DOm is
yr
possible.
WHILE ∼ DO1
op
WHILE ∼ DO1
C
IF ∼ GOTOn
END1
Usable END1
END2
Nn!!!!!!!!
12-112
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
[11] The looping can be independently programmed in a [12] If WHILE and END are not included in pairs in subprogram
er
subprogram which is called using G65/G66 from the (including macro subprogram), a program error will result at
midway of WHILE ∼ DOm. Up to 27 levels of nesting for
s
M99.
re
both programs can be done.
Main program Subprogram (O100)
ts
gh
Main program Subprogram (O100)
ri
WHILE ∼ DO1 WHILE ∼ DO1
WHILE ∼ DO1 G65 P100
ll
.A
G65 P100 M99
N
Usable M02
END1
O
To sub-
TI
END1 program
43
M99
A Alarm 868 DO-END MIS-MATCH
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-113
Serial No. 269443
1. Overview
In addition to standard user macros, the types of macros listed below are provided as external
output commands. These external output macros can be used to output character data or the
numerical data in variables to an external unit via an RS-232C interface. The data are outputted
in a data length of 7 bits with an even-parity bit added.
d.
PCLOS Termination processing of data output
ve
er
BPRNT Printout of character data or binary printout of variable data
s
re
DPRNT Printout of character data or numerical printout of variable data on a digit-by-digit
ts
basis
gh
ri
B. Programming order
ll
.A
N
POPEN Open command
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
BPRNT DPRNT
R
o.
O
N
C
al
Close command
ri
PCLOS
ZA
Se
A
IM
Detailed description
M
YA
- The command code POPEN must be included before a series of data output command codes.
3
- The control code for DC2 and the percentage code % are output from the NC unit to an
01
- Once POPEN has been set, it will remain valid until PCLOS is set.
(c
ht
Detailed description
- The command code PCLOS must be included after all data output command codes.
- The control code for DC4 and the percentage code % are outputted from the NC unit to an
external output unit.
- This command must be used together with POPEN. This command code must be included only
after POPEN.
- This command must be set at the end of the program even after data output has been aborted
using, for example, the NC reset switch.
12-114
Serial No. 269443
Detailed description
- The command BPRNT can be used to output characters or to output variable data in binary
form.
d .
- The designated character string is outputted directly in the ISO coded format. Alphanumerics
ve
(A to Z, and 0 to 9) and/or special characters (+, –, ∗, /) can be used. Of these characters, only
er
the asterisk (∗) is outputted as a space code.
s
re
- Since all variables are saved as those having a decimal point, the necessary number of
ts
decimal digits must be enclosed in brackets ([ ]).
gh
All variables are handled as data of four bytes (32 bits), and each byte is outputted as binary
ri
ll
data in the order of the most significant byte first. Minus data is processed as the complement
.A
for that data.
N
Example 1: If three digits are specified for 12.3456, then
O
TI
[12.346 × 103] = 12346 (0000303A)
43
PO
–100 (FFFFFF9C)
o.
O
N
- After the specified data has been outputted, the EOB (End Of Block) code is outputted in the
ri
ZA
Se
Programming format:
M
DPRNT[l1#v1[d1 c1]l2#v2[c2]LL]
YA
3
Variable number
(c
Character string
ht
ig
Detailed description
yr
op
- Output of character data or decimal output of variable data is performed in the format of ISO
C
codes.
- The designated character string is outputted directly in the ISO coded format.
Alphanumerics (A to Z, and 0 to 9) and/or special characters (+, –, ∗, /) can be used. Of these
characters, only the asterisk (∗) is outputted as a space code.
- Of the data contained in a variable, the necessary number of digits above the decimal point and
that of digits below the decimal point must each be enclosed in brackets ([ ]). The variable
data will then have its total specified number of digits, including the decimal point, outputted in
the ISO coded format in the order of the most significant digit first. No trailing zeros will be left
out in that case.
12-115
Serial No. 269443
1. Overview
External output macros can also be used to output data in text file format into the predetermined
directory on the hard disk.
2. Related parameters
- DPR14: Selection of an output destination port
Set DPR14 to “4” (Output onto the hard disk) under OTHER on the DATA I/O PARAMETER
display.
- DPR15: Number of lines in feed section
d.
ve
Set the required number of lines to be fed.
er
- DPR8: Output file size
s
re
Use this parameter to specify the maximum permissible output file size.
ts
Maximum permissible file size: DPR8 × 100 (KB)
gh
ri
A command for outputting a greater file will cause a corresponding alarm.
ll
.A
However, the file size limit is 100 KB if the value in DPR8 is 0.
N
O
Note: Output of a file of smaller size than the limit, however, may not be possible due to a
TI
shortage of available area on the hard disk.
43
A
R
94
The DATA I/O PARAMETER display can be selected by pressing the [DATA I/O PARAM.]
PO
26
C
al
3. Output file
ri
ZA
Se
The text file will be automatically outputted with a particular file name into the predetermined
A
IM
directory.
K
(A file of this name will be automatically created, if required, or the text data
YA
12-116
Serial No. 269443
POPEN %
DPRNT[OOOOOOOOOOOO] OOOOOOOOOOOO
DPRNT[XXXXXXXXXXXX] XXXXXXXXXXXX
.
d
DPRNT[IIIIIIIIIIII] IIIIIIIIIIII
ve
PCLOS %
s er
re
G0X100.Y100.Z100.
ts
M30
gh
ri
ll
[Parameter]
.A
DPR14: 4
N
O
DPR15: No setting
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
4. Related alarms
R
o.
C
al
ZA
Se
12-117
Serial No. 269443
12-10-9 Precautions
Use of user macro commands allows a machining program to be created by combining arithmetic
operation, judgment, branchining, or other macro commands with conventional NC commands
such as move commands, M-, S-, T-commands, etc. The statement defined by these macro
commands and that of conventional NC commands are taken as a macro statement and an NC
execute statement, respectively. The treatment of a macro statement has no direct rerations with
machine control. Its treatment as short as possible is effective for shortening machining time.
Parallel processing of the NC execute statement and the macro statement becomes possible
according to the setting of bit 6 of parameter F93.
(It becomes possible to process all macro statements in batch form by setting the parameter bit
to OFF when machining the workpiece, or to execute the macro statements block-by-block by
.
d
ve
setting the parameter bit to ON when checking the program. Therefore, set the parameter bit
er
according to your requirements.)
s
re
Sample program
ts
N1 G91G28X0Y0Z0
gh
N2 G92X0Y0Z0
ri
N3 G00X–100.Y–100.
ll
.A
N4 #101=100.∗COS[210.] Macro statements
N
N5 #102=100.∗SIN[210.]
O
N6 G01X#101Y#102F800
TI
43
A
A macro statement refers to a statement that consists of the following blocks:
R
94
PO
O
N
- Macro call command block (compassing macro call or cancellation G-code commands G65,
al
K
ri
12-118
Serial No. 269443
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7
Program analysis
Macroprogram statement N4 N5
Parameter treatment
OFF N2 N3 N6 N7
Next command
NC statement
treatment N1 N2 N3 N6
In execution
d .
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7
ve
Program analysis
er
N4 N5
s
Macroprogram statement
re
Parameter treatment
ON
ts
N2 N3 N4 N7
Next command
gh
NC statement
ri
treatment N1 N2 N3 N6
In execution
ll
.A
N
O
Machining program data is displayed as follows:
TI
43
OFF (Next command) N6 G01X#101Y#102F800 sentence. When N4, N5, and N6 are analized
o.
control continues.
al
K
ri
next command.
IM
12-119
Serial No. 269443
Y (sin θ)
.d
G65 Pp1 Aa1 Bb1 Cc1 Ff1 100.
ve
ser
re
A: Initial value 0°
B: Final value 360° X
ts
C: R of R∗SINθ
gh
0 90. 180. 270. 360.
F: Feed rate
ri
ll
.A
N
–100.
O
TI
43
MEP172
A
R
94
PO
26
O
N
M WHILE[#1LE#2]DO1
al
To subprogram
K
G65P9910A0B360.C100.F100
#10=#3∗SIN[#1]
ri
ZA
M Note
Se
G90G1X#1Y#10F#9
A
#1=#1+10.
IM
END1
K
#1 = 0 M99
Local variable set
ZA
in argument #2 = 360.000
A
#3 = 100.000
M
#9 = 100.000
YA
Note: G90G01X#1Y[#3∗SIN[#1]]F#9
makes one block command available.
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
12-120
Serial No. 269443
Main program –X x1
W
a1 : Start angle
G81Z–100.R50.F300 b1 : Hole quantity a1
To sub y1
G65P9920Aa1Bb1Rr1Xx1Yy1 r1 : Radius
program
.
x1 : X-axis center position
d
–Y
ve
y1 : Y-axis center position
er
MEP173
s
re
O9920
O9920 (Subprogram)
ts
gh
ri
#101=0 0 → #101 #101 = Hole count
ll
#102=#4003 G90,G91 - Read-in
.A
#103=#5001 → #102 #102 = G90 or G91
Note
Preceding coordinate
N
#104=#5002
read-in
O
#111=#1
X → #103 #103 = X-axis present position
TI
→ #104
43
WHILE[#101LT#2]DO1
PO
26
#120=#24+#18∗COS[#111]
R
Note
#121=#25+#18∗SIN[#111]
o.
No
O
#101 ≤ Hole
N
END
C
quantity
#122=#120 #123=#121
al
IF[#102EQ90]GOTO100 Yes
ri
ZA
Se
#122=#120–#103
Note + center coordinate X → #120
IM
#121 → #123
M
N100 X#122Y#123
YA
#102 = 90
01
)2
END1 No
M99
(c
→ #104
op
12-121
Serial No. 269443
–X –500. W
G28X Y Z
T1 M06
G90 G43 Z100. H01
G54 G00 X0 Y0
To subprogram
G81 Z-100. R3. F100 M03
G65 P9920X-500. Y-500. A0 B8R100.
G65 P9920X-500. Y-500. A30. B8R200.
G65 P9920X-500. Y-500. A60. B8R300. 100.
–500.
200.
300.
.
–Y
d
ve
s er
MEP174
re
ts
Example 3: Grid
gh
After hole data has been defined using fixed-cycle machining commands G72 to
ri
G89, hole positions are to be designated using macro call commands.
ll
.A
N
O
G81 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1
TI
–X x1
43
PO
j1
O
I : X-axis distance
N
J : Y-axis distance
al
ZA
shown on the
B : Y direction hole quantity
Se
next page.
A
–Y
IM
K
ZA
MEP175
A
M
YA
T1 M06 –X
01
–75.
ig
yr
To subprogram –Y
op
–100.
–Z
MEP176
12-122
Serial No. 269443
d .
0 → #113
ve
#113 = X-axis distance initial
X direction distance → #103
er
N2 #113=0 #103 = X direction distance
Note
s
#103=#9
re
No
ts
#105 > 0 N100 X direction hole drilling
gh
WHILE[#105GT0]DO1 completion check
#101=#101+#113
ri
Yes
#105=#105–1 Note
ll
X#101Y#102 #101 + #113 → #101 X coordinates renewal
.A
#105 –1 → #105 X direction hole quantity – 1
N
O
IF[#112EQ1]GOTO10
TI
IF[#111NE1]GOTO10 X#101 Y#102 Drilling command
43
A
R
94
PO
#103=0–#103
26
O
N
N10 #113=#103 No
C
ZA
N100 #106=#106–1
drilling direction reverse switch on
A
#110=#110+1
0 – #103 → #103
K
IF[#106LT0]GOTO200
1 → #112
ZA
#105=#1
A
N10
#102=#102+#104
M
Note
#111=#110 #103 → #113 X-axis drilling distance reset
YA
#111=#111AND1
3
N100
01
GOTO2
#106 – 1 → #106
)2
Yes
completion check
op
#106 < 0
C
END
No
12-123
12
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K 94
12-124 E
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
2. Programming format
.d
ve
G50 Xx Zz αα; (α is additional axis.)
ser
re
3. Detailed description
ts
For moving the tool by absolute programming data, the coordinate system needs to be deter-
gh
ri
mined in advance. The coordinate system can be set by a command of the following format.
ll
G50 X_ Z_ C_ ;
.A
N
This command sets a coordinate system in which a point on the tool, for example the tool tip
O
position, can be represented with coordinates (X, Z). This coordinate system is called workpiece
TI
43
coordinate system. A
R
94
Once a coordinate system is set, coordinates by absolute programming method will represent
PO
26
The command need not have all axes specified. To change coordinate systems in the flow of the
O
N
program, give a command with only an argument for the axis for which change is required.
al
K
ri
Example 1:
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
50 300
M
Chuck Jaw
YA
+X
3
Workpiece
01
+Z
φ350
)2
A
Workpiece
(c
zero point
ht
ig
Unit: mm
yr
op
C
13-1
Serial No. 269443
Example 2:
300
δX
δZ
Chuck Jaw
+X φ700
Workpiece
+Z
Workpiece
. d
zero point
ve
Unit: mm
ser
re
For setting at a reference point:
ts
gh
G50 X700.0 Z300.0;
ri
This coordinate system uses the center of turret rotation as a reference point.
ll
.A
Any point can be used as a reference. To compensate for δX and δZ, use the function of tool
N
position offset. For details, refer to Section 11-2.
O
TI
Remarks
43
A
R
- The basic machine coordinate system is shifted by G50 command to set a virtual machine
94
PO
26
coordinate system.
R
o.
- The G50 function code causes the maximum or minimum spindle speed to be set when it is
O
N
K
ri
- If a G50 command is given during tool offset, the coordinate system will be set in which the
ZA
Se
position without offset is represented with the values specified with the G50 command.
A
IM
- S value in a block of G50 will be regarded as an argument for maximum spindle speed setting,
ZA
13-2
Serial No. 269443
.
X
d
ve
er
7.0
s
160.
re
ts
gh
(300.) T01
ri
(φ700)
ll
.A
Z
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
TEP190
PO
26
(T01)
N
C
al
ZA
In this example, the coordinate system is corrected for the tool T01 by a shift command.
Se
A
IM
Example 1:
ZA
N04 G00 X50. Z50.; (40, 40) (40, 40) (40, 40) (40, 40)
ht
N05 G50 X0. Z0.; (–10, –10) (40, 40) (–10, –10) (40, 40)
ig
N06 G00 X50. Z50.; (40, 40) (90, 90) (40, 40) (90, 90)
yr
N07 T001000;
C
N08 G00 X0. Z0.; (0, 0) (50, 50) (0, 0) (50, 50)
N09 G28 U0 W0; (–50, –50) (0, 0) (–50, –50) (0, 0)
N10 M02; (–50, –50) (0, 0) (–50, –50) (0, 0)
13-3
Serial No. 269443
.
(–50, –50) (0, 0) (–50, –50) (0, 0)
d
N08 G28 U0 W0;
ve
N09 M02; (–50, –50) (0, 0) (–50, –50) (0, 0)
s er
re
Example 3: Offset data (–10.0, –10.0)
ts
Parameter K95 bit 2 = 0 Parameter K95 bit 2 = 1
gh
Program
POSITION MACHINE POSITION MACHINE
ri
ll
N01 G28 U0 W0; (0, 0) (0, 0) (0, 0) (0, 0)
.A
N02 G50 X0.; (0, 0) (0, 0) (0, 0) (0, 0)
N
(50, 50) (50, 50) (50, 50) (50, 50)
O
N03 G00 X50. Z50.;
TI
N04 G50 X0.Z0.T001001; (0, 0) (50, 50) (–10, –10) (40, 40)
43
PO
O
N
Note: Bit 2 of parameter K95 setting selects whether compensation movement is made on T
al
K
ri
ZA
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
13-4
Serial No. 269443
.
d
2. Detailed description
ve
er
1. G52.5 must be commanded in an independent block. An alarm will be caused (807 IL-
s
re
LEGAL FORMAT) when G52.5 and move commands are given in the same block.
ts
2. Program example
gh
ri
G50 X__ Z__;
ll
M
.A
G00 X__ Z__; POSITION counter with respect to the G50 system
N
G53.5; POSITION counter changed for the G53.5 system
O
TI
G00 X__ Z__;
43
M
A
R
94
PO
G00 X__ Z__; POSITION counter with respect to the G53.5 system
26
O
N
3. It depends on a parameter (F114 bit 6) whether G52.5 or G53.5 is selected when turning the
C
al
power on or resetting.
ri
ZA
Se
- A program end code (M30, M998, M999, %) is executed in the G53.5 mode.
M
4. When a G52.5 command is given in the mode of nose radius compensation, compensation
YA
data will be temporarily cancelled in the movement block preceding the G52.5 command. At
3
01
the time of the G52.5 command, the position of the virtual tool tip point is identical with the
)2
programmed position.
(c
ht
ig
yr
G41;
C
G53.5
TEP183
13-5
Serial No. 269443
5. A G52.5 command given in the mode of tool position offset, however, does not cause any
cancellation of offset data.
G53.5;
N2 M
N3
Offset vector N1 G00 Z100.;
N1
N2 G52.5;
Programmed path N3 G01 X100. Z100.;
G50 Ce
.
Ca Nose radius center path
d
ve
G53.5
s er
re
TEP184
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
13-6
Serial No. 269443
.
d
coordinate system with reference to the TOOL SET* and Z-OFFSET* values, a system appro-
ve
er
priate to a particular tool and a particular workpiece.
s
re
* TOOL SET: Machine coordinates of positioning the tool tip to the reference workpiece zero
point.
ts
gh
* Z-OFFSET: Amount of offset on the Z-axis from the reference workpiece zero point (used as
ri
the reference for tool setting values) to the zero point of a particular workpiece
ll
(zero point of a MAZATROL coordinate system).
.A
Use of the function eliminates the need for complicated coordinate handling, so that EIA/ISO
N
O
programs can be easily prepared in the same manner as MAZATROL programs.
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
Machine
R
o.
zero point
O
N
C
al
ZA
TOOL SET X
Se
A
IM
Reference workpiece
zero point
K
ZA
coordinate system
M
YA
As shown above, the zero point of a MAZATROL coordinate system refers to positioning the tool
3
01
tip onto the point of intersection between the axis of rotation and the face of the workpiece. In
)2
other words, a G53.5 command is equivalent to a “G50X0Z0;” command given after the above-
(c
mentioned positioning.
ht
- When G53.5 is commanded in G52.5 mode, the workpiece coordinate system currently
op
provided is cancelled, and the tool coordinate system for a tool currently selected is set.
C
Current position display is also changed to a value of new coordinate system then.
- When a tool change command (T-code) is executed in the G53.5 mode, the coordinate system
is automatically changed with respect to the new tool.
- When in the G53.5 mode a T-code and a move command are given in the same block, the
coordinate system is always modified after the movement, irrespective of the programming
order of the two commands within the block in question.
- G53.5 must be commanded in an independent block. An alarm will be caused (807 ILLEGAL
FORMAT) when G53.5 and move commands are given in the same block.
13-7
Serial No. 269443
2. Detailed description
1. When a MAZATROL coordinate system is cancelled by G52.5 in the G53.5 mode, the
coordinate system is returned to the workpiece coordinate system of G54 to G59. The
coordinate system to be restored is that which was cancelled by the G53.5 command, not a
system which was set by a G50 command in the G53.5 mode.
When G53.5 is set as an initial condition, the first G52.5 command in a program establishes
the coordinate system of G54.
2. A command with G53.5 as well as G52.5, and a T-code in the G53.5 mode are internally
divided into two blocks. The first output block, however, does not cause a stop in the
single-block operation mode.
d .
Command Output block 1 Output block 2
ve
er
G53.5 Commands other than G53.5 Corresponding G50 command
s
Commands for tool change, G50 command corresponding to the T-
re
T-code in the G53.5 mode
movement, etc. code
ts
gh
G52.5 Commands other than G52.5 Corresponding G50 command
ri
3. Supplement
ll
.A
1. Selection of workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) is ignored in G53.5 mode.
N
O
2. Selection of local coordinate system (G52) is ignored in G53.5 mode.
TI
43
3. When zero point return for all axes (other than the C-axis) is not yet finished using watchdog
A
R
94
method, a G53.5 command will cause an alarm. No alarm occurs, however, if a G53.5
PO
26
command is given in the same block with a G28 command the execution of which will fulfill
R
o.
4. When G53.5 and G50 commands are given in the same block, the commands are executed
al
K
ri
ZA
in the order of G50 to G53.5, irrespective of the programming order of the two commands
Se
5. When multiple G50 commands have been given before the selection of the G53.5 mode,
K
the coordinate system established by the last G50 command will be restored upon
ZA
6. When in the G53.5 mode a T-code and a G50 command are given in the same block, the
YA
coordinate system is modified with respect to the new tool after the execution of the G50
command.
3
01
7. When in the G53.5 mode a T-code and a G52.5 command are given in the same block, the
)2
G52.5 command only is executed without modification of the coordinate system for the new
(c
tool.
ht
ig
yr
op
C
13-8
Serial No. 269443
. d
beforehand that are agreed with the machine. (For G53.5 MAZATROL coordinate system, it is
ve
er
ignored.) By this command, subsequent axis commands are used as positioning at selected
s
workpiece coordinate system until the reset key is pressed.
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
Machine
.A
zero point
N
G58
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
G56
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
For the six workpiece coordinate systems, set the distance of each axis from the machine zero
point to the zero point of each coordinate system on the WORK OFFSET display.
K
ZA
2. Remarks
A
M
1. When G54 to G59 and move command are given in the same block, the coordinate system
YA
is changed to the specified one to move to the specified position on a new coordinate
3
system.
01
)2
2. When G54 to G59 are changed independently, the counter display of current position
(c
changes to a value on the specified coordinate system. (Machine does not move.)
ht
3. Workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 are correctly established after reference point return
ig
yr
4. When the power is turned on or when the reset key is pressed, G54 is selected.
C
5. The distance when coordinate system is moved by G50 is added subsequently to all
workpiece zero point offset values. For example, when coordinate system is moved by “G50
U_ W_” command in the selection of G54, G55 to G59 also move by the same distance.
Therefore, take care when having changed to G55.
6. The coordinate system cannot be established exactly for the C-axis by a command of G54
to G59 if it is given with the C-axis not being connected. Do not fail, therefore, to select the
milling mode (for C-axis connection) before entering G54 to G59 as required for the C-axis.
13-9
Serial No. 269443
.
2. Programming format
d
ve
er
A. Selection of a workpiece coordinate system
s
re
G54.1 Pn (n = 1 to 300)
ts
gh
Example: G54.1P48 Selection of P48 system
ri
Note: Omission of P and setting of “P0” function the same as “P1”. Setting a value other than
ll
.A
integers from 0 to 300 at address P causes the alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT.
N
O
B. Movement in a workpiece coodinate system
TI
43
G54.1Pn (n = 1 to 300) A
R
94
G90 Xx Yy Zz
PO
26
G54.1P1
o.
G90X0Y0Z0
C
al
K
ri
Example: G90G10L20P30X–255.Y–50.
K
ZA
G91G10L20P30X–3.Y–5.
M
3. Detailed description
01
)2
G10 L20 Pn Xx Yy Zz When n = 1 to 300: Correct setting of data for Pn-system origin
ig
G10 L20 Xx Yy Zz Correct setting of workpiece origin data for the current system, except
C
for G54- to G59-system (in which case: Alarm 807 ILLEGAL FOR-
MAT)
G10 Pn Xx Yy Zz Correct setting of workpiece origin data for the current system
G10 Xx Yy Zz Correct setting of workpiece origin data for the current system
13-10
Serial No. 269443
. d
ve
during G54.1 mode will cause the alarm 949 NO G52 IN G54.1 MODE.
s er
C. Related system variables
re
ts
The origin data of additional workpiece coordinate systems are assigned to system variables as
gh
listed-up in the following table:
ri
ll
1st axis to 16th axis or 1st axis to 16th axis
.A
P1 #70001 to #70016 P1 #7001 to #7016
N
O
P2 #70021 to #70036 P2 #7021 to #7036
TI
M M
43
M
A M
R
94
PO
M M
26
O
N
K
ri
ZA
The variable number for the k-th axis origin of the “Pn” coordinate system can be calculated as
Se
follows:
A
IM
70000 + 20 (n – 1) + k or 7000 + 20 (n – 1) + k
K
13-11
Serial No. 269443
.
G58
d
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
G54 G55 G56 G57
ri
ll
.A
N
All the six workpiece coordinate systems are shifted by the coordinate shift amount.
O
TI
- When the shift amount is specified, the workpiece coordinate system is shifted immediately.
43
A
R
(The shift amount is reflected in the current position counter.)
94
PO
26
- When “G50 X_ Z_” is specified after the shift amount has been specified, the shift amount is
R
o.
ignored.
O
N
C
al
ZA
Se
The above command permits rewriting a workpiece offset value to change the position of work-
YA
piece coordinate system. To move the workpiece coordinate system for each program, give the
3
Note: The timing at which the rewritten value becomes effective is after G54 to G59
)2
13-12
Serial No. 269443
d.
A coordinate system using machine zero point as the zero point of coordinate system is referred
ve
er
to as machine coordinate system.
s
The tool cannot always move to the machine zero point. In some cases, machine zero point is
re
set at a position to which the tool cannot move.
ts
gh
Machine coordinate system is established when the reference point return is executed after the
ri
power is turned on.
ll
Once the machine coordinate system is established, it is not changed by reset, workpiece
.A
coordinate system setting (G50), local coordinate system setting (G52) and other operation
N
unless the power is turned off.
O
TI
The positional information for stored stroke limit (G22, G23), which specifies the stroke of the
43
A
machine, must be set using the coordinate values of the machine coordinate system.
R
94
PO
26
2. Remarks
o.
O
N
1. When G53 is commanded, tool offset and tool nose radius compensation must be cancelled.
al
ZA
Se
2. Since the machine coordinate system must be set before G53 is commanded, at least one
A
IM
manual reference point return or automatic reference point return by G28 should be
executed after the power is turned on.
K
ZA
4. Virtual axes such as Y-axis cannot be commanded. (The execution gives an alarm.)
M
YA
5. This command is valid even with a MAZATROL coordinate system being selected (G53.5).
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
13-13
Serial No. 269443
. d
ve
er
G58 local
s
re
coordinate Machine zero point
system
ts
gh
ri
G58
ll
G56 local G57 local
.A
coordinate coordinate
system system
N
O
TI
43
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
Note: G52 can be used in place of G50 command. However, the distance through which the
al
K
ri
current coordinate system is shifted by G52 has no influence at all on the other work-
ZA
Se
13-14
Serial No. 269443
.
(x3, z3, α3)
d
ve
er
G28
s
re
(x2, z2, α2 ) G30
G29
ts
G29
gh
ri
Starting point
Intermediate point (x1, z1, α1)
ll
G30
.A
(0, 0) G28
N
Machine zero point
O
Starting point
TI
TEP191
43
A
R
94
PO
2. Programming format
26
G28 Xx1 Zz1 αα1; (α: Additional axis) Automatic return to reference point
o.
O
N
G29 Xx2 Zz2 αα2; (α: Additional axis) Return to start point
C
al
K
ri
ZA
3. Detailed description
Se
A
IM
Where x3, z3 and α3 denote the coordinates of the appropriate reference point, determined
M
YA
by the parameter as the distance from the zero point of the machine coordinate system.
2. Along the axes for which the initial return to the reference point (zero point) has not been
3
01
completed in manual mode after switching-on, the return occurs using the watchdog method.
)2
In that case, the direction of return is regarded as the same as the designated direction. For
(c
the second time onward, the return occurs at high speed to the reference point that was
ht
stored into the memory by the execution of the first return command. (The return using the
ig
yr
watchdog method can also be selected for the second time onward by a parameter.)
op
3. When return to reference point (zero point) is completed, a return completion signal will be
C
outputted and the monitor of the operation panel will display “#1” in the display field of the
axis name.
4. Command G29 is equivalent to the following commands:
G00 Xx1 Zz1 αα1;
This results in independent rapid motion of each axis.
G00 Xx2 Zz2 αα2;
Where x1, z1 and α1 are the coordinates of the intermediate point specified by G28 or G30.
5. A programming error will result if G29 is commanded without G28 (return to the reference
point) or manual return to the zero point being executed after switching-on.
13-15
Serial No. 269443
6. The coordinates of an intermediate point (x1, z1, α1 ) can be set with absolute as well as
incremental data.
7. G29 is valid for G28 as well as G30, and the positioning to the specified point occurs along
the axes concerned through the latest intermediate point.
8. Tool offset compensation is automatically cancelled (as required) for the path to the refer-
ence point, while it functions as appropriate for the positioning to the intermediate point.
9. During return to the reference point under a machine lock status, movement from the inter-
mediate point to the reference point is omitted. The next block is executed after positioning
to the intermediate point.
10. During return to the reference point in the mirror image mode, the mirror image is only valid
.
d
for the movement from the starting point to the intermediate point. That is, rapid positioning
ve
is performed through the ‘mirrored’ intermediate point to the real reference point.
ser
11. In the single-block operation mode, stop will be made also at the intermediate point.
re
ts
4. Sample programs
gh
ri
Example 1: G28 Xx1 Zz1;
ll
.A
N
Reference point (#1)
O
TI
First movement
First movement
43
A after power-on
after power-on
R
94
PO
quent movements
O
Intermediate point
N
(x1, z1)
al
Reference point
ri
ZA
Watchdog R (#1)
Se
G0 Xx1 Zz1;
IM
R
YA
3
G0 Xx2 Zz2;
ig
yr
op
13-16
Serial No. 269443
.
d
A R1
ve
Current position (x2, z2) New intermediate point
er
G30
G28
s
D
re
B
(x3, z3)
ts
(x1, z1) G29
gh
Old inter- R2
mediate point
ri
C Second reference point (#2)
ll
.A
N
TEP193
O
TI
43
PO
26
O
N
Use a G30 P2 (P3, or P4) command to perform return to the second (third, or fourth) reference
C
al
ZA
Se
A
IM
G30P2 G28
A
G28
M
Starting point
Intermediate
G30
point
3
01
G30P3
G30P4
)2
G29
(c
2. Programming format
G30 P2 (P3, or P4) Xx1 Zz1 αα1; (α: Addition axis.)
3. Detailed description
1. Use argument P2, P3, or P4 to designate returning to the second, third, or fourth reference
point (zero point). The return to the second reference point is automatically selected if
argument P is omitted or zero, one, five or a greater integer is set with address P.
13-17
Serial No. 269443
2. Return to the second, third, or fourth reference point is executed in the same manner as the
return to the first reference point via the specified intermediate point.
3. The machine coordinates of the second, third, and fourth reference point are to be preset in
the machine parameters M5, M6, and M7, respectively.
4. The intermediate point for a G29 command is always that which was specified by the
command given last for return to the reference point, be it the second, third, or fourth one.
–Z R#1
. d
ve
G30 Xx1 Zz1;
s er
re
R#2 G29 Xx2 Zz2;
ts
gh
(x2, z2)
ri
Second reference point +X
ll
.A
TEP196
N
O
TI
5. As for return to the reference point in the plane of tool nose radius compensation, the
43
A
movement from the intermediate point to the reference point is performed with the com-
R
94
pensation being temporarily canceled, and the next G29 command is executed on a path
PO
26
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
–Z R#2
IM
Programmed path
for G30 Xx1 Zz1;
A
M
(x1, z1)
YA
(x2, z2)
)2
+X
(c
ht
TEP197
ig
yr
6. After return to the second reference point, the nose radius compensation values for the
op
7. During return to the second reference point under a mahcine lock status, movement from
the intermediate point to the reference point is omitted. The next block is executed after
positioning to the intermediate point.
13-18
Serial No. 269443
–Z R#2
(x1, z1)
With mirror image
.d
for the X-axis
ve
Without mirror image
er
G30 P2 Xx1 Zz1;
s
+X
re
ts
TEP198
gh
ri
9. In the single-block operation mode, no stop will be made at the intermediate point.
ll
.A
13-12 Reference Point Check: G27
N
O
TI
1. Function and purpose
43
A
R
94
As with G28, execution of a G27 command will output a completion signal for return to the refe-
PO
26
rence point if the position arrived on the specified axis is the reference point. This function with
R
o.
positioning data for the reference point can be used, therefore, to check whether or not the
O
N
execution of a program is brought to an end with the reference point being arrived on the
al
specified axes.
ri
ZA
Se
2. Programming format
IM
Check No.
A
Check command
ht
ig
3. Detailed description
yr
op
- The number of axes for which the reference point check can be done at the same time depends
on the number of simultaneously controllable axes.
- An alarm will result if the ending position on the specified axis is not the designated reference
point.
13-19
Serial No. 269443
1. Outline
This command is used to determine a new coordinate system through the translation of the origin
of the currently active workpiece coordinate system and the rotation on an axis of coordinate.
Use this command to specify freely a plane in space which is convenient for programming.
2. Programming format
G68.5 Xx0 Zz0 Yy0 Ii Jj Kk Rr ; ........... Programmed coordinate conversion ON
G69.5 ; ........... Programmed coordinate conversion OFF
d.
ve
Xx0 Zz0 Yy0 : Coordinates of the center of rotation
er
Specify in absolute dimensions the translation of the workpiece origin.
s
re
i, j, k : Designation of rotational axis (1: valid, 0: invalid)
ts
I : X-axis
gh
J : Y-axis
ri
K : Z-axis
ll
.A
r: Angle and direction of rotation on the rotational axis
N
A positive value of angle refers to the left turn when seen from the positive
O
TI
side of the rotational axis.
43
A
R
94
3. Detailed description
PO
26
O
N
K
ri
ZA
+X +Z’
+X’
IM
K
ZA
–Y’
A
M
–Y
YA
+Y’
30°
3
–Z
01
+Z
)2
(c
ht
+Y
–X
ig
yr
After the selection of the G17 (X-Y) plane, the workpiece origin is shifted to the point
op
and the plane is rotated by 30 degrees on the Y’-axis. The new coordinate system (X’, Y’, Z’)
has thus been established.
- The cancel command G69.5 will set again the coordinate system subjected to the translation
and rotation by the preceding G68.5 command.
- In the G68.5 mode all the dimensions must be entered in radius values.
13-20
Serial No. 269443
.
Selection of the XY-plane
d
ve
G00 X0 Y0 Z20.;
er
G41;
s
re
G01 Z-5. F50;
ts
X10.Y-10.;
gh
G03 X10.Y10.R30.;
ri
M
ll
.A
G40;
G69.5; .......................................................
N
Cancellation of program coord. system rotation mode
O
N200 T005000; ........................................ Tool change, which is inhibited in the G68.5 mode
TI
43
G00 B30.; R
A
G50 X[#1+#5041] Z[#3+#5043];........
94
G17;
o.
O
N
G00 Z10.;
C
al
G83 X40.Y-30.Z-30.R5.P100 F80; ... Positioning on G17 plane and hole machining on Z-axis
ri
ZA
G80;
Se
G00 Z10.;
IM
G69.5;
K
M
ZA
M30;
A
%
M
YA
X’
3
01
Y’
ht
ig
X10.,Z10.,Y0
yr
op
13-21
Serial No. 269443
5. Restrictions
1. The G68.5 command cannot be given in the following modes:
- Tool nose radius compensation (G40 mode not selected)
- Fixed cycle (G80 not selected in the G-code group 09)
- Opposite turret mirror image (G68 mode)
2. The G68.5 command cannot be given in the mode of cross machining.
3. No tool change commands by T-code can be given in the G68.5 mode. A T-code in this
mode will be processed as a programming error.
4. A block in the G68.5 mode cannot be designated as restart position. The search for such a
d.
block as restart position will cause an alarm.
ve
5. Certain G-codes cannot be given in the G68.5 mode. Refer to the table “Usable G-codes in
er
s
the G68.5 mode” that follows. An alarm will be caused if an unavailable G-code is given.
re
6. If the addresses X, Y and Z are all omitted, no translation of the origin will occur and the
ts
gh
rotation will be performed on an existing axis of coordinate.
ri
7. All the arguments I, J and K must be specified in general as required. If one of the
ll
.A
arguments is omitted, such a block of G68.5 will be processed as a programming error.
N
Example 1: G68.5 X10.Z0 Y0 I0 J1 R30.; Format error
O
TI
If, in particular, all the arguments are omitted, then the axis perpendicular to the currently
43
A
selected plane will be regarded as the axis of rotation.
R
94
PO
26
Example 2: G17;
R
O
N
8. A block of G68.5 will be processed as a programming error if all the arguments I, J and K
al
ZA
Se
9. The codes G68.5 and G69.5 are not available for a system without the optional function of
K
13-22
Serial No. 269443
.
G17 02 X-Y plane section
d
ve
G18 02 Z-X plane section
er
G19 02 Y-Z plane section
s
G20 06 Inch command
re
G21 06 Metric command
ts
G22 04 Stored stroke check ON
gh
G23 04 Stored stroke check OFF
ri
G32 01 Thread cutting
ll
.A
G34 01 Variable lead thread cutting
G40 07 Tool radius/nose radius compensation OFF
N
O
G41 07 Tool radius/nose radius compensation, left
TI
G42 07 Tool radius/nose radius compensation, right
43
G60 00 A
Unidirectional positioning
R
94
ZA
13-23
13
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
ri
IM al
N
A o.
ZA 26
K
13-24 E
94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
d.
1. Overview
ve
er
During linear interpolation by G31, when an external skip signal is inputted, the feed will stop, all
s
re
remaining commands will be cancelled and then the program will skip to the next block.
ts
2. Programming format
gh
ri
G31 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Yy/Vv Ff ;
ll
.A
x, z, y, u, w, v : The coordinates of respective axes. These coordinates are designated using
N
absolute or incremental data.
O
f: Feed rate (mm/min)
TI
43
A
This command starts linear interpolation, and when an external skip signal is inputted, the feed
R
94
PO
will stop, the remaining distance of movement will be cancelled and the next block will be
26
executed.
R
o.
O
N
3. Detailed description
al
K
ri
ZA
asynchronous feed command is not made previously and if Ff is not commanded, the alarm
IM
SKIP SPEED ZERO will be caused. F-modal command data will not be updated by the F-
K
3. If feed rate is specified per minute, override, dry run and automatic acceleration/de-
YA
celeration will not be allowed. They will be effective when feed rate is specified per
revolution.
3
01
5. The execution of command G31 will immediately terminate if a skip signal is inputted at the
ht
beginning.
ig
Also, if a skip signal is not inputted until the end of command block G31, execution of this
yr
6. Setting this command code during tool nose radius compensation results in a program error.
7. Under a machine lock status the skip signals will be valid.
14-1
Serial No. 269443
4. Execution of G31
Example 1: When the next block is an incremental value command
G31 Z1000 F100;
G01 U2000 W1000;
.
d
ve
Movement when external
er
signal is not inputted
s
re
TEP199
ts
gh
Example 2: When the next block is a one axis move command with absolute value
ri
G31 Z1000 F100;
ll
.A
G01 X1000;
N
O
X
TI
43
A
R
94
Z
PO
26
R
o.
C
al
K
ri
ZA
TEP200
K
ZA
Example 3: When the next block is a two axes move command with absolute value
A
X
01
)2
(c
Z
ht
TEP201
14-2
Serial No. 269443
.
d
δ0
ve
: Amount of coasting (mm)
er
F : G31 skip rate (mm/min)
s
Tp : Position loop time constant (s) = (Position loop gain)–1
re
t1 : Response delay time (s) = (The time from skip signal detection until arrival at NC
ts
gh
through PC)
ri
t2 : Response error time = 0.001 (s)
ll
When using command G31 for measurement purposes, measured data δ1 can be corrected.
.A
Such corrections, however, cannot be performed for δ2.
N
O
TI
43
PO
26
R
o.
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Time (s)
t1 ± t2
K
Tp
ZA
TEP202
M
YA
The diagram shown below represents the relationship between the feed rate and the amount of
coasting that will be established if Tp is set equal to 30 ms and, t1 to 5 ms.
3
01
)2
Amount of
Tp = 0.03 Max. value
(c
Min. value
ig
0.040
yr
op
0.030
C
0.020
0.010
Feed rate F
(mm/min)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Relationship between the amount of coasting and the feed rate (Example) TEP203
14-3
Serial No. 269443
.d
F
ε=± × t2 ε : Reading error (mm)
ve
60
F : Rate of feed (mm/min)
er
t2 : Response delay time 0.001 (s)
s
re
ts
+1
gh
ri
Reading error
0
ε (µm)
ll
60 Rate of feed (mm/min)
.A
–1
N
O
TI
43
A
The shaded section corresponds
R
94
to measured data.
PO
26
O
N
60
al
ε=± × 0.001
K
60
ri
ZA
= ± 0.001 (mm)
Se
and measured data stays within the reading error range of ± 1 µm.
A
IM
TEP204
K
ZA
Coordinate data that has been read includes an amount of coasting. If, therefore, you are to
YA
check the coordinate data existing when skip signals were inputted, perform corrections as
3
directed above. If, however, the particular amount of coasting defined by response delay time t2
01
14-4 E
Serial No. 269443
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 15
15 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
.d
ve
X-axis
s er
M8
re
I2
ts
Upper limt
gh
for G22
ri
(X, Z)
ll
.A
Z-axis
N
O
(I, K)
TI
Lower limt for G22
43
A
R
94
PO
I3
26
M9
o.
O
N
ZA
Se
A
IM
2. Programming format
K
G23 (Cancellation)
01
)2
3. Detailed description
(c
ht
1. Both upper-limit and lower-limit values must be specified with machine coordinates.
ig
2. Use X and Z to set the upper limit of the prohibit area, and I and K to set the lower limit. If the
yr
value of X or Z is smaller than that of I or K, then the former and the latter will be used as the
op
C
4. Give a G23 command to cancel the pre-move stroke limit check function.
15-1
Serial No. 269443
15 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5. A block of G23 X_Z_ will cause the axis motion command X_Z_ to be executed in the
current mode of axis movement after cancellation of pre-move stroke limit check.
Note: Before setting G22, move the tool to a position outside the prohibit area.
. d
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
15-2 E
Serial No. 269443
1. Outline
When machining of different processes are performed by respective systems on a machine with
two systems of headstock (HD1 and HD2), or turret (TR1 and TR 2), the two systems can be
controlled by a single program.
The program section from “G109L!;” to “%” or to “G109L*;” is used for controlling the !-system.
2. Programming format
d.
ve
G109 L_;
ser
L = 1 : HD1 (or TR1)
re
2 : HD2 (or TR2)
ts
gh
The system number is to be specified by a value following the address L.
ri
ll
3. Notes
.A
N
1. Even if a value following L includes a decimal point or negative sign (–), it is ignored.
O
2. In the mode of single-block operation, the stop can be performed after execution of G109
TI
43
A
block. However, when the number specified by L belongs to the other system such as L2 in
R
94
3. G109 can be specified in the same block as G-codes other than of group 0. When specified
R
o.
in the same block as another G-code of group 0, the G-code specified later is effective.
N
C
al
4. The section from the head of a program to the place where G109 is commanded is common
ri
ZA
G28 U W;
G109 L1;
K
M
ZA
G109 L2;
YA
M30;
01
5. One block including more than 128 characters causes an alarm (ILLEGAL FORMAT).
)2
(c
6. In the remainder of this chapter, “HD1” and “HD2” generally refer to “TR1” and “TR2”,
ht
respectively, at once.
ig
yr
7. The surface speed (cutting speed) of the respective turning spindles is to be specified, with
op
G96S__R1 ............to specify the surface speed for the 1st spindle under “G109L1”
G96S__R2 ............to specify the surface speed for the 2nd spindle under “G109L1”
G96S__R2 ............to specify the surface speed for the 1st spindle under “G109L2”
G96S__R1 ............to specify the surface speed for the 2nd spindle under “G109L2”
16-1
Serial No. 269443
1. Outline
Axis control of 2nd spindle side by 1st spindle side or that of 1st spindle side by 2nd spindle side
is referred to as cross machining control. Cross machining control axis is specified by G110 and
G111.
Specify after G110 an axis address and the number of the spindle controlling the axis.
2. Programming format
G110 X_ Z_ C_; ..............Cross machining control axis and spindle number are specified.
d.
ve
1: Axis controlled by 1st spindle
er
2: Axis controlled by 2nd spindle
s
re
ts
G111;...............................Cross machining control axis specified by G110 is returned to normal
gh
control (not cross machining).
ri
ll
Specify the Z-axis for the lower turret as follows:
.A
Example:
N
G110 Z2; Selection of the lower turret’s Z-axis
O
TI
G00 Z–100.; All the Z-axial commands between G110 and G111 are processed
43
M A
as those for the lower turret.
R
94
PO
O
N
Example:
al
ZA
Se
G00 C45.123.; All the C-axial commands between G110 and G111 are processed
A
Prepare a program as follows to use the C-axis settings on the WORK OFFSET display for the
A
2nd spindle:
M
Example:
YA
G28UWH;
)2
T0100;
(c
16-2
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
M30; Program end
s er
3. Sample programs
re
ts
Examples of programming for the machine specifications with the secondary spindle
gh
The major sections of a sample program for machines equipped with the secondary spindle are
ri
shown below.
ll
.A
O1234
N
G53.5 MAZATROL coordinate system establishment
O
#101=124.750 (SP1 COF) 1st spindle side C-axis offset
TI
#102=10.664 (SP2 COF) 2nd spindle side C-axis offset
43
A
R
94
M901 1st spindle select mode (enter for machining at the 1st spindle side)
R
G50S3000
O
N
ZA
Se
G00Z0.8 Positioning
A
16-3
Serial No. 269443
.
2nd spindle C-axis clamping
d
M310
ve
G87Z-5.X5.Q5000P0.2F200 Longitudinal deep-hole drilling cycle
er
M312 2nd spindle C-axis unclamping
s
G80 Cancellation of fixed hole-drilling cycle
re
G111 2nd spindle C-axis selection revoking
ts
G28U0V0W0 Return to zero point (X, Y, Z)
gh
M30 End of program
ri
ll
4. Notes
.A
N
1. After the axis is changed by G110 or G111, always specify the coordinate system by G50.
O
2. G110 and G111 must always be given in a single-command block.
TI
43
3. A
When axis address is commanded by G110 in increment, (for example, U and W are used)
R
94
PO
it causes an alarm. And when a value following the axis address includes a decimal point or
26
O
N
4. In the single-block operation mode, the stop is performed after execution of G110 and G111
C
al
blocks.
K
ri
ZA
5. The tool information to be used in tool offsetting does not automatically change for the other
Se
system on the occasion of designating for cross machining control an axis which is in direct
IM
relation to tool movement. Use, therefore, a G53 command (for positioning in the machine
K
6. As long as an axis in direct relation to tool movement is controlled for cross machining, do
A
M
machining.
)2
8. The axis being under cross machining control in automatic mode of operation cannot be
(c
controlled in manual mode. An attempt to do so will only result in the alarm ILLEGAL
ht
9. Barrier is effective also during axis change. In other words, barrier is checked in the region
op
of HD1 side for the axis of HD1 side and in that of HD2 for the axis of HD2 independently of
C
16-4
Serial No. 269443
.
G10 00 Data setting/change
d
ve
G27 00 Reference point return check
er
G28 00 Reference point return
s
re
G29 00 Return from reference point
ts
G30 00 Return to 2nd/3rd/4th reference point
gh
G30.1 00 Return to floating reference point
ri
G36
ll
00 Measurement target data setting
.A
(G36.5)
N
G50 00 Coordinate system setting/Spindle limit speed setting
O
G53 00 MAZATROL coordinate system selection
TI
43
G65 00 A
Macro call
R
94
K
ri
ZA
13. When the axis (normally the X-axis) relevant to the constant peripheral speed control is
designated for cross machining control, the speed of the turning spindle may change
(c
ht
steeply in accordance with the change in positional information to be used in the calculation
ig
15. Do not designate the X-axis for cross machining control unless the current position on the
inclined Y-axis is of the zero point. Otherwise an alarm will be caused (CROSS MACHIN-
ING IMPOSSIBLE).
16. As long as the X-axis is undergoing the cross machining control, the inclined Y-axis is inter-
locked internally. In this case a motion command concerning the inclined Y-axis will only
result in an alarm being caused (129 INSIDE INTERLOCK AXIS).
16-5
Serial No. 269443
1. Outline
The function outputs M-, S-, T- and B-codes (second miscellaneous function) commanded after
G112 to the counterpart system.
2. Programming format
G112 L_ M_ M_ M_ M_ S_ T_ T_ B_;
3. Notes
d.
ve
1. Do not give any other G-code in one block with a G112 command; otherwise the alarm
er
ILLEGAL FORMAT wil be caused.
s
re
2. Do not enter any codes concerned (M, S, T or second miscellaneous function) before
ts
G112L_ within a block; otherwise the alarm ILLEGAL FORMAT wil be caused.
gh
3. Entering values with any other address than N, M, S, T, and that for second miscellaneous
ri
ll
function in one block with a G112 command will lead to the alarm ILLEGAL ADDRESS.
.A
4. The alarm ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will be caused if any of the following commands is
N
O
given in one block with a G112 command:
TI
43
M0, M1, M2, M30, M99, M-codes for waiting, and M-, S-, T- or second miscellaneous
A
R
94
5. Entering a number for the self-system or non-existent system with address L as well as in
R
o.
6. An attempt to specify an offset number in the T-code format for turning machines will lead to
al
K
ri
ZA
7. The T-code in a G112 block will only cause the corresponding code for tool designation to
IM
8. The number of the codes concerned to be entered in a G112 block is limited as follows:
ZA
A
Entering codes in excess will only result in the last ones within the limit being outputted.
YA
9. The single-block stop can occur after the execution of a G112 block.
3
01
10. Use waiting M-codes so as to output the codes concerned (M, S, T or second miscellaneous
)2
function) to one and the same system at one time from multiple systems.
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
16-6 E
Serial No. 269443
1. Outline
The movement of the upper and lower turrets is to be controlled in a single program as follows:
G109 L1;.................................... Selection of the upper turret
.d
ve
Commands for the upper turret
ser
re
M30;
ts
G109 L2;.................................... Selection of the lower turret
gh
ri
ll
Commands for the lower turret
.A
N
O
M30;
TI
43
2. Remarks A
R
94
PO
26
1. If an argument L includes a decimal point or negative sign (–), a programming error will
R
result.
o.
O
N
2. In the mode of single-block operation, the stop can be performed after execution of G109
al
block. However, when the number specified by L belongs to another system, the single-
ri
ZA
Se
3. G109 must be given in an independent block. If any other command is given in the same
block, a programming error will result.
K
ZA
4. Note that the program section under no specification by the G109 command is used for all
A
5. The restart position for the [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function must be set within a
program section which is prepared commonly for all the systems.
3
01
6. The control for a constant surface speed (by G96) is always conducted with reference to
)2
that tool tip’s position of either turret which is nearer to the axis of turning.
(c
ht
7. The call command for a MAZATROL program must be given in program sections of both
ig
turrets for one and the same program. If it is given for either turret only, the flow of the called
yr
MAZATROL program will enter in a waiting state which cannot be cleared and, as a result,
op
17-1
Serial No. 269443
1. Outline
Waiting commands are used to time the operation of the upper and lower turrets as required.
Two types of waiting command are provided: M-code and P-code, which can be used freely and
even mixedly.
Note: Waiting commands (corresponding M- and P-codes) are all ignored in a hole machin-
ing fixed cycle mode (G83 to G89). Cancel the hole machining fixed cycle mode
beforehand with G80 to give a waiting command.
. d
2. Detailed description
ve
er
A. M-codes for waiting
s
re
The execution of the commands for turret A will be stopped at the position of a waiting M-code
ts
gh
with some number until the program flow for turret B reaches a waiting M-code with the same
ri
number.
ll
.A
Programming format
N
M∗∗∗; (∗∗∗ denotes a number from 950 to 997.)
O
TI
Program structure
43
A
R
94
Commands for the upper turret Commands for the lower turret
PO
26
G109L1; G109L2;
R
o.
A M950;
N
M951;
al
M950;
ri
ZA
Se
B <A>
IM
M951;
K
ZA
M997; M997;
A
C <B>
M
YA
M30; M30;
3
01
Operation
)2
∇ ∇ ∇
ht
Upper turret A B C
ig
yr
∆ ∆ ∆
C
Note 1: Use waiting M-codes in accordance with the parameter settings concerned:
K49 ........First code number for waiting M-codes,
K50 ........Total number of waiting M-codes.
Note 2: A waiting M-code must be given in a single-command block. It may not function as
waiting command if it is entered in the same block together with other instructions.
17-2
Serial No. 269443
Program structure
Commands for the upper turret Commands for the lower turret
G109L1; G109L2;
.
d
ve
A P10;
er
P100;
s
P10;
re
ts
B <A>
gh
ri
P200;
ll
.A
P3000; P3000;
N
C <B>
O
TI
43
M30; M30;
R
A
94
Operation
PO
26
∇ ∇ ∇
N
C
al
Upper turret A B C
K
ri
ZA
Se
∆ ∆ ∆
IM
Note 1: A waiting P-code must be given in a single-command block. It may not function as
A
M
waiting command if it is entered in the same block together with other instructions.
YA
Note 2: Use the waiting P-codes in the ascending order of their number, since one turret
3
cannot be released from the wait state until the program flow for the other turret
01
17-3
Serial No. 269443
1. Outline
Balanced cutting is achieved through the symmetrical movement of the upper and lower turrets.
It helps the reduction in the vibration of a long workpiece and permits the cutting speed to be
doubled for the saving of the machining time.
During the balanced cutting one turret acts as the main turret (master turret) and the other as the
subordinate turret (servant turret). Enter the movement commands for the balanced cutting in a
program section for the main turret.
.
2. Programming method
d
ve
The balanced cutting can be achieved by combining the following three commands:
s er
re
- Waiting command (M950 to M997 or P1 to P99999999)
ts
- M562;..........Coupling command for the two turrets
gh
- M563;..........Coupling cancellation command
ri
ll
The main points of programming the balanced cutting are the following:
.A
1) Enter the waiting command just before the balanced cutting in order to synchronize the
N
O
movement of both turrets.
TI
43
2) Enter the command M562 for the main turret in order to couple both turrets. The subordinate
A
R
94
3) Enter the movement commands for the main turret. The subordinate turret will be moved
R
o.
C
al
4) Enter the command M563 after the movement commands for the master turret to cancel the
K
ri
ZA
coupling.
Se
5) Enter the waiting command for the main turret to release the subordinate turret from the wait
IM
state.
K
ZA
3. Program structure
A
M
Given below is an example of program structure with the upper turret as the master.
YA
Commands for the upper turret Commands for the lower turret
3
01
G109L1; G109L2;
)2
P1000; P1000;
ig
Commands for
C
balanced cutting
17-4
Serial No. 269443
.
d
N004 G00 X156.Z63.;
ve
N005 Z29.;
er
N006 G01 X150.;
s
re
N007 X148.Z30.;
Movement
ts
N008 X128.; commands for
gh
N009 G00 X800.Z70.; balanced cutting
ri
N010 X112.Z63.T0202;
ll
N011 G01 X120.Z59.F0.4;
.A
N012 Z30.;
N
N013 X130.;
O
TI
N014 G00 X800.Z70.;
43
M563; A
R
94
P20;
PO
26
M901;
al
ZA
Se
P10;
A
M03 S250;
IM
T01T01;
K
N102 X92.Z65.M08;
ZA
M950;
A
17-5
Serial No. 269443
1. Programming format
The basic format of programming for milling with the lower turret is an application of the
preparatory function G109 (Two processes in one program; see Section 16-1).
G109 L_;
L = 1: HD1 (TR1)
2: HD2 (TR2)
.
G109 L1;
d
ve
M ....... Commands for Upper turret
er
M
s
re
G109 L2; ....... Selection of 2nd spindle (Lower turret)
M200;
ts
gh
M203;
ri
M Commands for Lower turret
ll
M Fixed cycle for hole machining
.A
M210;
N
M30
O
% .............. Common to both spindles (both turrets)
TI
43
PO
26
As shown in the table below, not only for turning can the lower turret be used, but also for milling.
R
o.
C
al
ZA
A
IM
Lower
K
turret
ZA
A
M
YA
The G-codes of fixed cycle for hole machining are available for milling with the lower turret.
)2
(c
17-6
Serial No. 269443
.
M950 for waiting
d
ve
N109 M30;
er
N200 G109 L2; Lower turret selection
s
N201 T0222;
re
N202 M902; 2nd spindle selection
ts
N203 M300;
gh
N204 M203 S800;
ri
N205 X-102.Z-30.C180.;
ll
Fixed cycle for hole machin-
.A
N206 G87 Z-30.H30.X70.R5.Q5000 P.2 F200 M210; ing with Lower turret
N
N207 G80;
O
N208 M950;
TI
43
N209 M30;
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
D740PB0073
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
17-7
Serial No. 269443
1. Overview
G109L1 G109L1
M901 (*1) M902 (*2)
M200 (*3) M300 (*3)
M203 (*4) M203S___
C__ (*5) [1] [2] G110C2
C__ (*5)
G111
For EIA: give one of
the command sets
[1] to [4] separately,
.
or the combination
d
ve
of [1] and [3] for
simultaneous
er
execution.
s
G109L2
re
G109L2
M901 M902
ts
M200 [4] [3] M300
gh
M203S___ M203
G110C1
ri
C__ (*5)
C__ (*5)
ll
G111 *1 M901 for the 1st spindle selection.
.A
*2 M902 for the 2nd spindle selection.
*3 M200/M300 for milling mode selection for 1st/2nd spindle.
N
*4 M203 for milling spindle’s normal rotation.
O
*5 Machining data D737PB0074
TI
43
A
R
94
<Single workpiece>
R
o.
!: Possible
C
al
EIA
ZA
Upper turret ! ! ! !
IM
Lower turret ! ! ! !
K
ZA
!: Possible —: Inapplicable
YA
Upper turret
3
Turning ! — — —
(c
1st spindle
Milling — ! (Note) — —
ht
Lower
ig
turret Turning — — ! —
2nd spindle
yr
Milling — — — ! (Note)
op
C
Note: Simultaneous milling is possible in the EIA programming format, indeed, but take care
of a phase difference occurring for machine structural reasons.
17-8
Serial No. 269443
. d
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
17-9
Serial No. 269443
G109L2
M950
. d
M30
ve
s er
2 Lower turret — 2nd spindle; Turning, Separate
re
G109L1
M950
ts
gh
M30
ri
G109L2
ll
.A
M902
N
M302
O
M303 S!!!
TI
M Machining data
43
A
M305
R
94
M950
PO
26
M30
R
o.
O
N
G109L1
K
ri
M901
ZA
Se
M200
A
M203 S!!!
IM
M Machining data
K
M205
ZA
M202
M950
A
M30
M
YA
G109L2
3
M950
01
M30
)2
(c
M902
ig
M300
yr
M203 S!!!
op
M Machining data
C
M205
M302
M950
M30
G109L2
M950
M30
17-10
Serial No. 269443
G109L2
M950
M30
. d
ve
s er
6 Lower turret — 2nd spindle; Milling, Separate
re
G109L1
M950
ts
M30
gh
ri
G109L2
ll
M902
.A
M300
N
M203 S!!!
O
M Machining data
TI
M205
43
A
M302
R
94
M950
PO
26
M30
R
o.
O
N
C
al
G109L1
ri
ZA
M950
Se
M30
A
IM
G109L2
K
M901
ZA
M200
A
M203 S!!!
M
M Machining data
YA
M205
M202
3
M950
01
M30
)2
(c
ht
M950
yr
M30
op
C
G109L2
M901
M202
M3 S!!!
M Machining data
M5
M950
M30
17-11
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
10 Upper turret — 1st spindle; Turning, G109L1 G109L2
ri
Lower turret — 2nd spindle; Milling. M901 M902
ll
.A
M202 M300
M3 S!!! M203 S!!!
N
M Machining data M Machining data
O
TI
M5 M205
43
M950
A M302
R
94
M30 M950
PO
26
M30
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
M901 M902
YA
M200 M302
M203 S!!! M303 S!!!
3
M205 M305
)2
M202 M950
(c
M950 M30
ht
M30
ig
yr
op
C
17-12
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
13 Upper turret — 2nd spindle; Turning, G109L1 G109L2
ri
Lower turret — 1st spindle; Turning. M902 M901
ll
.A
M302 M202
M303 S!!! M3 S!!!
N
M Machining data M Machining data
O
TI
M305 M5
43
M950
A M950
R
94
M30 M30
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
M902 M901
YA
M300 M202
M203 S!!! M3 S!!!
3
M205 M5
)2
M302 M950
(c
M950 M30
ht
M30
ig
yr
op
C
17-13
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
s er
re
ts
16 Upper turret — 2nd spindle; Milling, G109L1 G109L2
gh
Lower turret — 1st spindle; Milling. M902 M901
ri
G28UW T003000
ll
T014000T0 M6
.A
M300 M200
N
M203 S!!! M203 S!!!
O
M950 M950
TI
G110C2M951 M951
43
A (Note) (Note)
M952 G110C1M952
R
94
G00C90. G00C0.
PO
26
G111 G111
R
o.
G00X100.Z0. G00X100.Z-10.
N
G01Z-50.F100 G01X50.F100
al
ZA
Z0. X100.
Se
M M
IM
M205 M205
K
M202 M202
ZA
M953 M953
A
M30 M30
M
Note: Give commands of cross machining control (G110) successively for the 1st and 2nd
01
spindles.
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
17-14
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
18 Upper turret — 2nd spindle; Turning,
G109L1 G109L2
ri
Lower turret — 2nd spindle; Turning.
M902 M902
ll
.A
M302
M303 S!!!
N
M950 M950
O
M Machining data M Machining data
TI
43
M951
A M951
R
M305
94
PO
M952 M952
26
M30 M30
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
M950 M950
YA
M200
3
M951 M951
01
M202
ht
M952 M952
ig
M30 M30
yr
op
C
17-15
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
17-16 E
Serial No. 269443
POLYGONAL MACHINING 18
18 POLYGONAL MACHINING
.
d
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
R
o.
O
N
Polygonal machining has an advantage of machining polygonal workpieces in shorter time than
al
polar coordinate interpolation. However, it has a disadvantage of not giving an accurate polygon.
ri
ZA
Se
As a result, polygonal machining is usually used to machine bolt heads and nuts not requiring an
A
IM
accurate polygon.
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
Quadrangle Octagon
ig
yr
D732S0036
C
18-1
Serial No. 269443
18 POLYGONAL MACHINING
2. Programming format
Starting polygonal machining
G51.2 P_ Q_ D_;
- Give a command so that addresses P and Q provide the following:
(Address P): (Address Q) = (Workpiece rotational speed) : (Rotary tool speed)
- Command the rotational direction of rotary tool with the sign of address Q as follows.
When the sign of Q is “+”, positive direction is selected.
When the sign of Q is “–”, negative direction is selected.
- Use address D to specify the workpiece spindle to be used. The arguments D available, 1 to 4,
d .
refer to the settings of machine parameters (BA55 to BA58) as follows:
ve
er
Argument D Workpiece spindle selected
s
1 As set by parameter BA55
re
2 As set by parameter BA56
ts
gh
3 As set by parameter BA57
ri
4 As set by parameter BA58
ll
.A
- The default value of argument D is “1” (selection of workpiece spindle as set by BA55).
N
An alarm will be caused (809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT) if the specified argument D is not
O
TI
supported as appropriate by the parameter setting concerned. (For example: D3 or D4 is
43
A
entered with the parameters BA57 and BA58 being set to “–1” [Invalid].)
R
94
PO
R
o.
P 1 to 9
al
Q –9 to –1, 1 to 9
ri
ZA
Se
D 1 to 4
A
IM
Command arguments P, Q and D with integers. They cannot be commanded with a value
including decimal fraction.
K
ZA
The designation of an address other than P, Q and D in a G51.2 block leads to an alarm (806
A
ILLEGAL ADDRESS), which will also be caused by designating any address in the G50.2
M
block.
YA
G50.2;
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
18-2
Serial No. 269443
POLYGONAL MACHINING 18
3. Sample program
G28 U0 W0;
T1100; Selection of tool No. 11 for polygonal machining
G98; Mode of feed per minute
M260; Polygonal machining mode selection
M3 S250; Normal rotation of spindle at 250 min–1
G51.2 P1 Q-2 D1; Reversed rotation of milling spindle at 500 min–1
G0 X100.Z30.;
G0 X46.6 Z3.;
G1 Z-20.F50;
G1 X60.F100;
G0 Z3.; Machining
d.
G0 X46.0;
ve
G1 Z-20.F30;
ser
G1 X60.F100;
re
G0 X100.Z30.;
ts
G50.2; Polygonal machining mode cancellation
gh
M261; Polygonal machining mode cancellation
ri
M205; Milling spindle stop
ll
.A
M5; Spindle stop
M30; End
N
O
TI
4. Notes
43
A
R
94
1. Take care not to program in the following manners (otherwise the alarm 807 ILLEGAL
PO
26
- Giving G51.2 in the mode of G96 (control for constant surface speed),
al
K
ri
- Selecting the milling mode in the G51.2 mode, or giving G51.2 in the milling mode,
A
IM
- Giving a command for spindle synchronization, orientation, or linkage in the G51.2 mode,
ZA
- Giving a fixed cycle command in the mode of G51.2, and vice versa.
A
M
2. Command a proper workpiece rotating speed and ratio of such workpiece rotating speed to
YA
the rotary tool speed so that the maximum rotating speed of rotary tool cannot be exceeded.
3
3. Move command such as one for general control axis cannot be given to the rotary tool axis
01
4. A mahine coordinate value of rotary tool axis is displayed within a range from 0 to
ht
“movement distance per rotation”. Relative coordinates and absolute coordinates are not
ig
renewed.
yr
op
6. Jogging feed and handle feed for the rotary tool axis are ineffective during polygonal
machining.
7. Peforming thread cutting during polygonal maching makes the start point of thread cutting
be shifted. Therefore, cancel the polygonal machining before thread cutting.
8. Rotary tool axis during polygonal machining is not counted as a synchronous control axis.
9. During polygonal machining, it is possible, indeed, but not advisable at all to apply feed hold
or to change the override value for fear of deformation of the workpiece.
18-3
Serial No. 269443
18 POLYGONAL MACHINING
10. Avoid applying an emergency stop or resetting during polygonal machining for fear of
deformation of the workpiece due to a sudden stop of axis motions.
11. The alarm 956 RESTART OPERATION NOT ALLOWED will be caused when it is
attempted to start modal restart operation from a block in the G51.2 mode.
12. The gear for rotary tool, if provided, must be taken into account in setting the ratio of milling
spindle speed to spindle speed (Q : P).
13. Since phase matching between turning and milling spindles cannot be obtained, it is not
possible to start machining with the workpiece in a specific angular position.
14. Give the required commands for multiple cutting steps (e.g. roughing and finishing) in one
and the same program section of the G51.2 mode. If the mode is canceled, it is in genegal
d .
no more possible to obtain the same machining surface.
ve
15. The spindle speed can be changed in the mode of polygonal machining without fear of
ser
disturbing the phase of machining surface.
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
18-4 E
Serial No. 269443
MEASUREMENT MACROS 19
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
This chapter describes the measurement macros provided for implementing MAZATROL
workpiece measuring, tool measuring and coordinate measuring functions on the EIA/ISO
program. The measurement macroprograms are to be called up with G136 (Measurement Macro
Call) and G137 (Correction Macro Call). The use of these G-codes requires the corresponding
settings of the relevant parameters (J).
1. Detailed description
Give special macro call instructions (with G136 and G137) to use the measurement macros.
The appropriate system of workpiece coordinates must be established beforehand for the macro
.
to operate correctly. Moreover, the B-axis positioning in an angle and linear positioning to an
d
ve
intermediate point must be completed as appropriate before the macro call since such
er
operations are not provided for in the macroprogram.
s
re
Note that modal information on G90/G91 (absolute/incremental programming) and the F-code
ts
(rate of feed) may be changed through the execution of the G136 measurement macro.
gh
ri
A. Related parameters for macro call (J29 to J36)
ll
.A
Set the related parameters (J) as instructed below in order that the relevant system macros may
N
correctly be called by the special G-codes.
O
TI
43
J1 J5 J9 J13 J17 J21 J25 J29 J33 J37 Work No. of the called program
PO
26
J2 J6 J10 J14 J18 J22 J26 J30 J34 J38 G-code for macro call
R
o.
J3 J7 J11 J15 J19 J23 J27 J31 J35 J39 Type of macro call
N
J4 J8 J12 J16 J20 J24 J28 J32 J36 J40 Not used
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
19-1
Serial No. 269443
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
.
measurement
d
OD and ID On the axis of the turning spindle Arbitrary
ve
Tool measurement Arbitrary (because the machine coordinate system is used)
er
Coordinate measurement MAZATROL coordinate system (G53.5)
s
re
ts
C. Coordinates rotation (G68)
gh
The programmed coordinates rotation mode (G68) must always be canceled before calling the
ri
ll
measurement macro.
.A
N
D. Tool length offset
O
TI
The measurement macro performs length offsetting for the touch sensor in the same manner as
43
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
19-2
Serial No. 269443
MEASUREMENT MACROS 19
E. Measurement patterns and required addresses
The arguments used in the measurement and correction macros are as tabulated below.
Use address Q to specify the measurement pattern.
Address
Pattern G-code
X Y Z A B C H I J K D M U V W R S T Q
X WIDTH G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 1
Y WIDTH G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 2
Z WIDTH G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 3
X GROOVE G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 4
.
Y GROOVE G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 5
d
ve
Z GROOVE G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 6
er
+X STEP G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 7
s
re
–X STEP G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 8
ts
+Y STEP G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 9
gh
–Y STEP G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 10
ri
Workpiece
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
ll
+Z STEP G136 11
.A
–Z STEP G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 12
N
OUTER X G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 13
O
TI
OUTER Y G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 14
43
INNER X G136 ! ! A ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 15
R
94
PO
INNER Y G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 16
26
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
R
O
N
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
K
IN WIDTH G136 17
ri
ZA
IN GROOVE G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 18
Se
Correction/Printout G137 ! ! ! ! ! ! —
ZA
A
M
Correction/Printout G137 ! ! ! ! —
YA
Z FACE G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 81
Coordinate
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 91
3
C FACE G136
01
C GROOVE G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 92
)2
C STEP G136 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 93
(c
Correction/Printout G137 ! ! —
ht
ig
- (∗) Do not enter the argument S (for sensor tool), in general, for external measurement.
- OD and ID measuring movements are performed on a YZ- or ZX-plane cutting the third axis (X
or Y) in its origin.
- Set in general the origin of the X- and Y-axis coordinates on the axis of the turning spindle.
- Omit the argument S (sensor designation) as required to suppress tool change operation (e.g.
for fear lest an interference should occur after tool change). In this case, no information on the
sensor tool can be printed out by G137.
19-3
Serial No. 269443
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
. d
[3] Correction on the “T2” tool and the measurement results printed out.
ve
er
Address Name Description
s
re
X Starting point X X-axis coordinate of the starting measurement point. (Note 3)
ts
Y Starting point Y Y-axis coordinate of the starting measurement point. (Note 3)
gh
Z Starting point Z Z-axis coordinate of the starting measurement point.
ri
ll
A Ending point X X-axis coordinate of the ending measurement point. (Note 3)
.A
B Ending point Y Y-axis coordinate of the ending measurement point. (Note 3)
N
C Ending point Z Z-axis coordinate of the ending measurement point.
O
TI
I Upper tolerance limit Upper limit of tolerance. (Note 3)
43
PO
O
N
ZA
S Sensor tool Tool No. and suffix (before and after decimal point) of touch sensor. (Note 2)
K
- “Diameter” measuring movements must be performed on a YZ- or ZX-plane containing the axis
A
M
of turning operations. For this reason, be sure to set the workpiece origins of the X- and Y-axis
YA
Note 1: Argument K for EIA/ISO measurement has almost the same meaning as parameter
(c
K19 for MAZATROL programs. “K” and K19 denote respectively a distance from the
ht
center, and one from the contact point, of the probe, as shown below.
ig
yr
op
K19
C
Note 2: See the chapter entitled TOOL FUNCTIONS for more information on the tool specifying
method.
Example) T2.3 ・・・ Tool No. 2 with suffix C
Note 3: In the mode of “G10.9 X1” (Diameter data input for the X-axis), designate positions on
the Y-axis (with addresses Y, B, or U) in diameter values as well as positions on the
X-axis (with X, A, or U).
19-4
Serial No. 269443
MEASUREMENT MACROS 19
B. Workpiece measurement - External (G136: Q19, Q20)
G136 Z1 M100. I9. J-9. D1 Q20 ・・・・・・・・・・・ [1]
G137 A1 B0 C0 V3.0 ・・・・・・・・・・・ [2]
[1] External Z measurement executed.
[2] Correction on the tool “T3” and the measurement results printed out.
. d
J Lower tolerance limit Lower limit of tolerance.
ve
Change of sign of 0: Not reversed
er
D
correction value 1: Reversed (Note)
s
re
M Desired value Desired value for the section to be measured externally.
ts
19: External measurement of a milling tool
gh
Q Measurement pattern
20: External measurement of a turning tool
ri
ll
Note: Setting a value other than 0 and 1 functions the same as setting “1”.
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
19-5
Serial No. 269443
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
d .
output pattern
can be changed by parameter DPR8.)
ve
2: Output to a printer (via RS232C)
s er
Valid for milling tools only.
re
B Data item to be corrected 0: Tool diameter (Note 3)
ts
1: Tool length (Note 5)
gh
0: Executed
ri
C Correction
1: Not executed (Note 4)
ll
.A
Used for an offset No. designated.
Type of the tool for
D 0: Correction for a milling tool
N
correction
1: Correction for a turning tool (Note 5)
O
TI
V No. and suffix (before and after decimal point) of the tool concerned. (Note 1)
43
PO
H
26
Offset No. for correction No. of the offset data on which correction is to be conducted.
(Note 2)
R
o.
O
N
Note 1: See the chapter entitled TOOL FUNCTIONS for more information on the tool specifying
al
method.
ri
ZA
Se
Note 2: Setting both H (offset No.) and V (tool for correction) results in the alarm 993 MACRO
A
IM
MEASUREMENT ALARM 4.
Note 3: Setting a value other than 0 and 1 functions the same as setting “0” (for diameter).
K
ZA
Note 4: Setting a value other than 0 and 1 functions the same as setting “1”.
A
M
Note 5: “D0” for OD/ID measurement or “B1” for Width/Groove measurement leads to the
YA
19-6
Serial No. 269443
MEASUREMENT MACROS 19
D. Tool measurement
1. TOOL EYE measurement (G136: Q52)
M283 ・・・・・・・・ TOOL EYE set in the measuring position.
G136 B1 I-9.J-9.M1 R0.2 Q52 ・・・・・・・・ TOOL EYE measurement #1 (with breakage check).
G137 A1 C0 V2.1 ・・・・・・・・ Correction and printout.
M284 ・・・・・・・・ TOOL EYE returned to the waiting position.
.
Omit the argument I if tool measurement (for X) is not required.
d
ve
Tolerance for Wear Z data.
er
J Tolerance for Wear Z
Omit the argument J if tool measurement (for Z) is not required.
s
re
Measurement section of the TOOL EYE.
ts
#1. OUT, Normal #2. OUT, Rev.
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
M Measurement section
94
PO
26
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
Note 1: Setting a value other than 0 and 1 functions the same as setting “1”.
3
Note 2: Set the precise value of nose-R of the tool to be measured with address R; other-
01
wise the tool cannot be brought properly into contact with the TOOL EYE sensor.
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
19-7
Serial No. 269443
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
.
Tool No. for correction
d
(Note 2) Used for correction on the MAZATROL tool data.
ve
H No. of the offset data on which correction is to be conducted.
er
Offset No. for correction
(Note 2)
s
re
ts
Note 1: See the chapter entitled TOOL FUNCTIONS for more information on the tool specifying
gh
method.
ri
Note 2: Setting both H (offset No.) and V (tool for correction) results in the alarm 993 MACRO
ll
.A
MEASUREMENT ALARM 4.
N
Note 3: Setting a value other than 0 and 1 functions the same as setting “1”.
O
TI
43
O
N
ZA
Se
- For type C: Milling tools: GEOMETRIC OFFSET Z (as length) or NOSE-R (as dia.)
M
- For type D: Milling tools: Geometric Offset Z (as length) or NOSE-R (as dia.)
3
Give G136 commands separately, as required, for measuring the length and diameter of a
ht
tool to set the two types of offset data under different numbers. (A diameter measurement
ig
must always be preceded by the length measurement for the same tool.)
yr
19-8
Serial No. 269443
MEASUREMENT MACROS 19
F. Coordinate measurement [Reference surface Z] (G136: Q81)
G136 X50.Y0.Z-5.C45.R-10.M1 I0.J2.D0.Q81
d .
R Measurement surface distance Workpiece coordinate (Z) of the surface to be measured.
ve
0: Z-axis value is to be specified with I
er
M Direction of approach
1: X-axis value is to be specified with I (Note 2)
s
re
J Measurement stroke Distance for measuring feed from the starting point.
ts
I Initial point coordinate Axis coordinate in accordance with argument M.
gh
D Head index angle for touch sensor Selection from 0°, 90°, and 180°. (Note 3)
ri
1: Turning spindle 1
ll
T Spindle selection
.A
2: Turning spindle 2 (Note 4)
N
Q Measurement pattern Designation of measurement pattern.
O
TI
- This type of measurement-macro call instruction is only available for G-code series T [Turning
43
A
R
machines]. Giving the instruction for G-code series M [Machining centers] leads to an alarm.
94
PO
26
- Give a G53.5 command beforehand to set a MAZATROL coordinate system; otherwise the
R
o.
- Give beforehand a command of change for the desired sensor tool, and index the head as
al
K
ri
- A G136 command with argument Q81 (for measurement of reference surface Z) is designed for
IM
- Giving the instruction in the mode of cylindrical interpolation (G7.1) leads to an alarm (808 MIS
ZA
SET G CODE).
A
M
- Take care not to give from another system (with G112) a command of spindle rotation to be
YA
Note 2: Setting a value other than 0 and 1 functions the same as setting “1”.
(c
Note 3: Setting an angle other than 0°, 90°, or 180° causes an alarm.
ht
ig
Note 4: Setting a value other than 1 and 2, as well as the omission, functions the same as
yr
setting “1”.
op
C
19-9
Serial No. 269443
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
d .
ve
Target C-axis coordinate.
R Target point C
er
(Only required for measurement of reference surface C)
s
re
0: Z-axis value is to be specified with I
M Direction of approach
1: X-axis value is to be specified with I (Note 2)
ts
gh
Amount of return movement after measurement.
K Return distance
(Setting unit: mm or in)
ri
ll
Distance for measuring feed from the starting point.
.A
J Measurement stroke
(Setting unit: mm or in)
N
E Number of measurement retrials Number of retrials by shifting the measurement starting point.
O
TI
F Shifting amount for retrial Amount of shifting the starting point for measurement retrial.
43
PO
U X coordinate of C-axis center X-axis coordinate of the center of the C-axis (as set in parameter S5).
N
C
al
Y Y coordinate of C-axis center Y-axis coordinate of the center of the C-axis (as set in parameter S5).
K
ri
ZA
measurement
IM
1: CCW (Note 2)
S Head index angle for touch sensor Selection from 0°, 90°, and 180°. (Note 3)
K
ZA
1: Turning spindle 1
T Spindle selection
2: Turning spindle 2 (Note 4)
A
M
- This type of measurement-macro call instruction is only available for G-code series T [Turning
3
01
machines]. Giving the instruction for G-code series M [Machining centers] leads to an alarm.
)2
- Give a G53.5 command beforehand to set a MAZATROL coordinate system; otherwise the
(c
- Give beforehand a command of change for the desired sensor tool, and index the head as
yr
- A G136 command with argument Q91 (for measurement of reference surface C) is designed
C
for setting, or updating, the C-OFFSET value on the SET UP MANAG. display.
- Giving the instruction in the mode of cylindrical interpolation (G7.1) leads to an alarm (808 MIS
SET G CODE).
- Take care not to give from another system (with G112) a command of spindle rotation to be
executed during measurement.
Note 1: Enter the coordinates in radius values.
Note 2: Setting a value other than 0 and 1 functions the same as setting “1”.
19-10
Serial No. 269443
MEASUREMENT MACROS 19
Note 3: Setting an angle other than 0°, 90°, or 180° causes an alarm.
Note 4: Setting a value other than 1 and 2, as well as the omission, functions the same as
setting “1”.
d .
ve
2: Output to a printer (via RS232C)
er
0: Executed
C Correction
s
1: Not executed (Note)
re
ts
The data item to be corrected on the SET UP MANAG. display is of the machining program
gh
called up for the currently active system, and depends on the type of the preceding measure-
ri
ment by G136 as follows:
ll
.A
- Reference surface Z ............................Correction on the Z-OFFSET item.
N
O
- Ref. surf. C, Groove/Step width C .......Correction on the C-OFFSET item.
TI
43
Note: Setting a value other than 0 and 1 functions the same as setting “1”.
A
R
94
PO
3. Illustration
26
R
o.
A. Workpiece measurement
N
C
al
The example bellow refers to the measurement operation for Width X. The measuring tool path is
K
ri
ZA
determined by the positional arguments (for starting and ending points, approach point, and
Se
measurement stroke) designated in the macro-call block. The only difference from the corre-
IM
sponding MAZATROL measurement is that the approach point can be designated as desired.
K
1. Programming
ZA
G54
M
19-11
Serial No. 269443
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
2. Tool path
[2] [2]
[3]
.
[3]
d
[4]
ve
k
er
k
s
[7]
re
ts
[9]
gh
k
ri
k
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
X X
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
Z Y
C
al
D740PB0017
K
ri
ZA
Se
[2] Intermediate point before the approach point; programmed beforehand as required.
K
[3] Rapid traverse (G0 mode) to the approach point (u, v, w).
ZA
The measurement macro controls the operation starting from the point [2] through the
A
measuring movements for the starting and ending points up to the escape on the Z-axis to
M
YA
- The measurement macro controls the movements starting with the motion to the approach
)2
point and ending with the escape to the approach point level for each pattern.
(c
ht
- The position of the approach point also determines the level to be reached by the final
ig
escape as well as the level for the transfer movements from the first for the second
yr
measurement point. This also applies to the Y-axis in the relevant motions on the XY- or
op
YZ-plane. Take due care in designating the approach point, therefore, to allow for a safety
C
19-12
Serial No. 269443
MEASUREMENT MACROS 19
d .
Approach pt. (u, v, w)
ve
s er
re
ts
Approach pt. (u, v, w)
gh
ri
Meas. stroke (k)
ll
.A
Meas. stroke (k)
N
3) Outside/Inside Diameter measurement
O
TI
Meas. stroke (k) Approach pt. (u, v, w) Meas. stroke (k)
43
A
R
94
PO
26
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
D740PB0018
19-13
Serial No. 269443
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
B. Tool measurement
There are no differences in tool measurement between MAZATROL and EIA/ISO programming
types.
C. Coordinate measurement
There are three types of coordinate measurement to be executed by a G136 block as follows:
- Reference surface Z...........Measurement of Z-OFFSET
- Reference surface C ..........Measurement of C-OFFSET (by one-point measurement)
- Step/Groove width C ..........Measurement of C-OFFSET (by two-point measurement)
.d
1. Reference surface Z
ve
er
This type of measurement macro is designed for measuring the Z-offset value in order that
s
the workpiece coordinate Z of the reference surface may agree with the dimension specified
re
on the machining drawing.
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
A
TI
C B
43
A
R
94
D
PO
26
A: Approaching motion
R
K
ri
ZA
D740PB0019
Se
A
IM
2. Reference surface C
K
Use this type of macro to measure the C-axis coordinate of the reference surface when the
ZA
Approach pt.
3
01
)2
Starting pt. B
(c
A: Preliminary measurement
A B: Return after preliminary
ht
measurement
ig
yr
op
C
19-14
Serial No. 269443
MEASUREMENT MACROS 19
3. Step/Groove width C
Use this type of macro for both-side measurement on a step or groove to obtain the center
coordinate of the step/groove.
The measurement on the first side is performed in the first step preliminarily at a higher
speed (of approaching) to quickly detect the target surface. Once the preliminary
measurement has been done successfully, a precise measurement is performed in the
second step slowly (at the rate of skip feed).
Since the step or groove has been detected, the measurement on the other side occurs in a
single step at the rate of skip feed.
Approach pt.
d.
ve
D E
er
Starting pt. C
s
A A: Preliminary measurement
re
B: Return after prel. measurement
B
ts
C: Real measurement
gh
D: Return after real measurement
E: Transference to the starting point
ri
of measurement on the other side
ll
F F: Real measurement on the other
.A
G side
G: Return after real measurement on
N
the other side
O
TI
43
Axis of rotation A
R
Target angular position
94
on the C-axis
PO
on the C-axis
26
D740PB0021
o.
O
N
C
al
ZA
Se
A. Workpiece measurement
IM
The designated data of starting and ending points and tolerances in the program, and the related
K
data on the AUTO MEASURE display, are processed and indicated respectively as follows:
ZA
A
MAZATROL
)2
G10.9X0 (Series M)
(c
G122.1 (Series T)
ht
EIA/ISO
G10.9X1 (Series M)
yr
G123.1 (Series T)
op
Note 1: The “G10.9X0” (Radius data input) mode is established upon completion of the work-
piece measurement.
Note 2: The K19 parameter functions as a radius value even in the OD/ID measurements.
19-15
Serial No. 269443
19 MEASUREMENT MACROS
B. Tool measurement
Tolerance values X and Z refer to diameter and radius data, respectively. Tolerance X must
denote a radius value, however, if the X-axis is not currently set (*) to the axis of diameter values.
Moreover, preparatory functions G122.1 and G123.1 are not available.
* According to the setting in machine parameter M18 bit 5.
C. Coordinate measurement
All types of data are processed as radius values.
The mode of G122.1 (Radius data input for the X-axis) is automatically selected when the G136
macro concerned is called up.
d .
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
19-16 E
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
J37 = 100009401 (Fixed value for the number of the macroprogram to be called for
er
tornado tapping)
s
re
J38 = 130 (Fixed value for the number of the G-code to be used for macro call)
ts
J39 = 2 (Fixed value for the type of macro call)
gh
ri
2. Programming format
ll
.A
The following format refers to hole machining on the face [or O. D. surface].
N
G17 [or G19];
O
TI
G130 R_Z_D_T_V_F_H_I_J_K_Q_E_M1 [or M0];
43
PO
G67;
26
R
o.
C
al
R
K
ri
ZA
E
Se
Cutting surface
A
IM
R: Position of R-point
I 45° Z: Position of hole bottom
K
D: Hole diameter
ZA
T: Tool diameter
H V: Hole depth
V
A
F: Feed rate
M
H: Chamfering amount
YA
I: Pitch 1
J: Pitch 2
3
Z
M: Hole machining axis (0: X, 1: Z or oblique)
(c
D TEP300
ht
ig
- Arguments D (hole diameter) and T (tool diameter) must satisfy the following condition:
D ≥ T ≥ D/2.
C
- Argument K is used to select whether finishing is to be (K1) or not to be (K0) executed on the
bottom of the hole.
- Set the hole position separately from the macro-call G-code (G130).
- As is the case with usual fixed cycles, actual machining with axial movement can only be
executed for a block containing the hole position data.
- Do not fail to set the code G67 as required to cancel the modal call.
- Set the code G122.1 (Radius data input for the X-axis) as required beforehand to use the
tornado tapping function.
20-1
Serial No. 269443
3. Description of movement
A. Hole machining
1. With chamfering
After moving from the current position to the R-point on the hole axis and then approaching
to a point on the 2nd R-point level, chamfering is performed by a spiral-helical interpolation
first, and then cylindrical machining is carried out to the bottom by a circular-helical
interpolation.
Cutting feed
Initial point Rapid traverse
R-point
. d
Approach point
ve
R 2nd R-point
er
E
s
Cutting
re
surface
ts
gh
Chamfer Pitch 1
ri
Hole depth
ll
.A
N
O
TI
Pitch 2
43
A
R
94
R
o.
2. Without chamfering
O
N
After moving from the current position to the R-point on the hole axis and then approaching
al
K
ri
ZA
through the hole radius and to a point on the 2nd R-point level, cylindrical machining is
Se
Cutting feed
K
R-point
A
Approach point
M
2nd R-point
R
YA
E
3
Cutting
01
surface
)2
(c
Hole depth
ht
ig
yr
Pitch 2
op
C
20-2
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
ser
Escape point
re
ts
gh
ri
TEP303
ll
.A
2. Without bottom finishing
N
After cutting down to the bottom of the hole by helical interpolation, the tool escapes radially
O
TI
to the axis of the hole while axially returning through quarter the pitch, and then returns in
43
A
the axial direction to the initial point or R-point at the rapid traverse.
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Escape point
K
1/4 pitch
ZA
A
M
YA
TEP304
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
20-3
20
C
op
yr
ig
- NOTE -
ht
(c
)2
TORNADO TAPPING (G130)
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 26
K
20-4 E
94
C
O 43
Serial No. 269443
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 269443
.d
!
ve
[WORK No.] is highlighted and the WORK No. SELECT window appears.
er
Remark: Refer to the Operating Manual for the WORK No. SELECT window.
s
re
(4) Enter the new work number of a program to be constructed.
ts
gh
- Specifying a work number of a program registered already in NC unit allows the program
ri
to be displayed on the screen. Therefore, constructing a new program requires specifying
ll
a work number which has not been used. The conditions how work numbers are used are
.A
displayed on the WORK No. SELECT window.
N
O
(5) Press the [EIA/ISO PROGRAM] menu key.
TI
43
- Press the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu key instead of [EIA/ISO PROGRAM] if a work number
A
R
94
R
o.
Cursor
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Set data using alphabetic keys, numeric keys and INPUT key .
IM
INPUT
K
- When INPUT key INPUTis pressed, the cursor is moved to the top of the next line, and then
ZA
(7) Press the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key to end the editing.
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
21-1
Serial No. 269443
21-2-1 General
Establishing a constructing mode on the PROGRAM (EIA/ISO) display allows the following
menu to be displayed as an initial one.
Terms [1] to [6] represent functions related to the program editing. Use of the functions permits
.
d
ve
the following operations:
er
- Inserting and altering data at any position
s
re
Data can be inserted and altered at any position on the display.
ts
- Erasing the data
gh
Data displayed on the display can be erased.
ri
ll
- Searching for the data
.A
Data can be searched in the following four ways.
N
O
1) Searching for the top line of the program
TI
43
Other EIA/ISO programs registered in the NC unit can be copied into the selected program, or
al
any data character string in the selected program can be copied into a given position of the
ri
ZA
Se
EIA/ISO program.
A
(Given that EIA/ISO program, in which several lines of data are already provided, is selected,
ht
and editing mode is established, and also that ALTER menu item is not highlighted in the
ig
(1) Press the [ALTER] menu key as required to obtain the normal display state (ALTER).
- When ALTER is displayed, press the menu key to cancel the highlighting.
(2) Move the cursor to the position where data must be inserted.
- The cursor can be moved to any direction (vertically and horizontally).
(3) Enter the required data.
! Data is inserted in sequence into the position where the cursor is placed.
! Data previously set behind the cursor position are moved behind the inserted data.
21-2
Serial No. 269443
d .
ve
3. Erasing the data
er
(1) Move the cursor to the head of the character string to be erased.
s
re
(2) Press the [ERASE] menu key.
ts
gh
! The character at the cursor position is highlighted and the [ERASE] menu item is also
ri
highlighted.
ll
.A
(3) Move the cursor to the position next to the end of the character string to be erased.
N
! The portion from the head of the character string specified in (1) to the position before
O
TI
the cursor is highlighted, which indicates that the highlighted portion provides the
43
object of erasure. A
R
94
PO
26
G00 X100.
o.
O
N
G00 Z20.I
C
Cursor position
al
ZA
M03
Se
Cursor
A
IM
Example: (Continued)
A
M
YA
M03
)2
(c
21-3
Serial No. 269443
d.
(2) Press the [SEARCH FORWARD] menu key or [SEARCH BACKWARD] menu key.
ve
!
er
[SEARCH FORWARD] or [SEARCH BACKWARD] is highlighted.
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
- To search for a character string in the area before the cursor position, press the [SEARCH
R
FORWARD] menu key, and for the area after the cursor position, press [SEARCH
o.
O
N
(3) Set the character string to be searched for and press the input key.
ri
ZA
Se
! The cursor moves to the head of the character string which has been found first.
A
IM
- Press the data cancellation key (CANCEL) to stop halfway the searching operation, whose
K
Remark: Pressing the input key in sequence allows the cursor to move to the character string
A
M
A. Copying a program
)2
(1) Move the cursor to the position where the program is to be copied.
(c
ht
!
op
[PROGRAM COPY] is highlighted and the WORK No. SELECT window appears.
C
(4) Set the work number of the program to be copied and press the input key.
! The program is inserted into the cursor position.
Note: MAZATROL programs cannot be copied.
21-4
Serial No. 269443
d.
Cursor position in (1)
ve
IN002 M08
er
M03 Cursor
s
re
(5) Press the input key.
ts
gh
! The area being highlighted is established as the object to be copied.
ri
(6) Move the cursor to the position where the character string is to be copied.
ll
.A
! The cursor only moves, and the area highlighted does not change.
N
Example:
O
TI
N001 G00 X10. Z10.
43
G00 X100. A
R
94
G00 Z20.
PO
26
N002 M08
R
IM03
o.
O
N
Cursor
al
ZA
A
IM
Example: (Continued)
N001 G00 X10.Z10.
K
G00 X100.
ZA
G00 Z20.
A
N002 M08
M
Z10.
YA
G00 X100.
G00 Z20.
3
M03
01
)2
(6) First, carry out Steps (1) to (5) of B. Set the workpiece number of a new program where the
ig
! The character string is copied in the new program, and the area highlighted is returned
C
to normal display.
Remark: Pressing the [PROGRAM FILE] menu key allows the WORK No. SELECT window to
be displayed.
21-5
Serial No. 269443
d .
object of moving.
ve
er
Example:
s
re
N001 G00 X10. IZ10.
ts
G00 X100.
gh
G00 Z20.I
ri
N002 M08 Cursor position in (1)
ll
M03
.A
Cursor
N
(4) Press the input key.
O
TI
! The area being highlighted is established as the object to be moved.
43
A
R
94
(5) Move the cursor to the position where the character string is to be moved.
PO
26
! The cursor only moves, and the area highlighted does not change.
R
o.
Example: (Continued)
N
C
al
ZA
Se
G00 X100.
A
G00 Z20.
IM
N002 M08
IM03
K
ZA
Cursor
A
M
Example:
)2
(c
Z10.
ig
G00 X100.
yr
21-6
Serial No. 269443
d.
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
(3) Set the character string before replacement.
.A
Enter the character string to be replaced using alphanumeric keys, and press the tab key
N
O
.
TI
43
A
(4) Set the new character string after replacement using alphanumeric keys, and press the
R
94
input key.
PO
26
! The cursor moves to the head of the character string before replacement that has been
R
o.
C
al
ZA
Se
! The character string before replacement at the cursor position is replaced by the
A
character string after replacement, and the cursor moves to the head of the next
IM
character string before replacement. Pressing the [REPLACE] menu key in sequence
K
allows the character string before replacement to be replaced in order of being found.
ZA
A
When replacing the special character string at the cursor position is not required, press the [NO
M
Remark 2: To replace all the character strings in the program, press the [NEXT] menu key.
)2
Remark 3: Press the data cancellation key (CANCEL) to stop halfway the total replacement by
(c
the NEXT menu function, whose running state is indicated by the message CNC
ht
21-7
Serial No. 269443
.
d
ve
ers
re
ts
gh
ri
- The character string selected with the cursor is usable.
ll
.A
(2) Move the cursor to the characters corresponding to the required macro-instruction and
N
press the input key.
O
!
TI
The macro-instruction is entered in the editing zone of the program.
43
A
(3) Press the menu selector key to display the menu for normal data input, and continue
R
94
PO
program editing.
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
21-8
Serial No. 269443
d .
! The screen is divided into the left and right part. One and the same section of the
ve
program is initially displayed in both parts.
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
D740PB002E
01
- The editing operation can only be carried out in the part the title (WNo.) of which is highlighted.
)2
(c
- The display contents in the other part will remain unchanged even after the editing in the active
ht
part. Press the [CHANGE PROGRAM] menu key to change the display in the other part
ig
21-9
Serial No. 269443
d.
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
PO
26
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
D740PB003E
A
IM
The editing is only possible for the part whose title (WNo.) is currently highlighted. The method to
change the active part is indicated below.
A
M
The data after the editing will not be displayed in the other part (of the same WNo.) unless this
YA
21-10
Serial No. 269443
d.
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
A
R
94
D740PB002E
PO
26
!
O
The highlighting of the title is transferred from the left-hand to the right-hand part to
N
K
ri
ZA
- The contents in the right-hand part will have been modified at the same time according to
Se
the editing operation performed for the left-hand part (of the same WNo.).
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
D740PB004E
21-11
Serial No. 269443
.
! The menu item is highlighted and the DIRECTORY CHANGE window appears on the
d
ve
screen.
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
43
- The options IC CARD PROGRAMS and ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM will only be
A
R
94
(2) Use the cursor keys to select the desired storage area.
R
o.
C
al
!
K
With a memory area other than that of STANDARD PROGRAM being selected, the
ri
ZA
color of the background of the PROGRAM display changes to yellow. Follow the same
Se
creating and editing procedure, however, as for programs in the STANDARD PRO-
IM
GRAM area to prepare a new program, or edit an existing one, for the selected memory
K
area.
ZA
- The area selection made from this window will be maintained till turning off the NC power.
A
M
- The title bar displays the current selection of the memory area.
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
21-12 E